Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

then+and+there

  • 1 ὥσπερ

    ὥσπερ, or [full] ὥς περ, Adv. of Manner,
    A like as, even as,

    ζῆν ὥ. ἤδη ζῇς S.Ph. 1396

    ;

    ἐσῴζετ' ἂν.., ὥ. οὐχὶ σῴζεται Id.El. 994

    ; but the Verb is more often left to be supplied,

    οὔ τι κατακρύπτουσιν.., ὥ. Κύκλωπες Od.7.206

    , cf. 2.333, Il.4.263, 14.50; ἔξεστί θ', ὥ. Ἡγέλοχος, ἡμῖν λέγειν .. Ar.Ra. 303;

    τεταγμένοι ὥ. ἔμελλον Th.4.93

    ;

    τοῖς ἠτυχηκόσιν ὥ. ἐγώ D.45.1

    ; Hom. freq. puts a word between ὡς and περ, e.g.

    ὡς σύ περ αὐτή, ὡς τὸ πάρος περ, ὡς ἔσεταί περ Od.19.385

    , Il.5.806, 1.211; as for instance,

    ὅταν χορὸς.. γίγνηται, ὥ. <ὁ> εἰς Ηλον πεμπόμενος X.Mem.3.3.12

    ; ὥσπερ differs from ὡς in Hom., in that it seldom has an antecedent expressed, as in Il.24.487, τηλίκου ὥ. ἐγών; also in Hes.Th. 402, ὣς δ' αὔτως.., ὥ. ὑπέστη; but in Trag. and [dialect] Att. ὥ. is very freq. after demonstr. words; before οὕτως, Meliss.3, Ar.Av. 188; after it, S.Tr. 475, etc.; ὥ. καὶ.., οὕτω καὶ .. X.Cyr.7.5.75, cf. Pl.R. 354b; ὥ.., ὧδε .. S.OT 276;

    τοιοῦτος ὥ. Pl.Prt. 327d

    ; αὐτοῦ ὥ. εἶχον just as they were, then and there, Hdt. 2.121.δ, cf. S.Ant. 1235;

    εὐθὺς ὥ. εἶχεν X.An.4.1.19

    ;

    εὐθὺς ὥ. ἔτυχε Id.HG3.1.19

    ;

    τὰν τράπεζαν κάτθετε ὥ. ἔχει Sophr.

     in PSI11.1214a2; καὶ τὸν δαελὸν σβῆτε ὥ. ἔχει on the spot, ib.14: c. gen.,

    ὥ. ἔχει δόξης Pl.R. 612d

    : strengthd.,

    ὥ. γε

     just exactly as,

    Ar.Nu. 673

    ; ὥ. καί even as,

    ὡς καὶ ἐγώ περ Il.6.477

    ;

    ὥ. καὶ ἄλλο τι Th.1.142

    , etc.: ὥ. also follows ἴσος, in Od.20.282, μοῖραν.. ἴσην, ὡς αὐτοί περ ἐλάγχανον, cf. S.El. 533; so after ὁ αὐτός, Pl.Phd. 86a, D.9.33; after

    ὅμοιος, ὅμοιος ἀτμὸς ὥ. ἐκ τάφου πρέπει A.Ag. 1311

    , cf. Th.4.34.
    2 ὥσπερ ἄν c. subj., v. infr. 111; c. opt.,

    ὥσπερ ἄν τις.. λέγοι Pl.Phd. 87b

    , cf. X.HG3.1.14; cf.

    ὡσπερεί 11

    .
    II to limit or modify an assertion or apologize for a metaphor, as it were, so to speak,

    ὥ. ἀκονιτί Th.4.73

    ;

    τὸν ἐγκέφαλον ὥ. σεσεῖσθαί μοι δοκεῖς Ar.Nu. 1276

    , cf. Pax 234;

    ἅμα μὲν.. ὥ. ὑπεφθόνει X.Cyr.4.1.13

    , cf. Pl.Phdr. 270d, Cra. 384c; in later Gk. sts. after the word to which it refers,

    ἐσφιγμένον ὥ. Porph.Chr.26

    ; βάθρον ὥ. Sch.Pi.O.8.33; στέφανος ὥ. τῶν πόλεων τὰ τείχη ib.42: freq. with parts.,

    ὥ. ἐγγελῶσα S.El. 277

    ;

    ὥ. ἐντεταμένου τοῦ σώματος Pl.Phd. 86b

    ; ὥ. τι τῶν ἄλλων εὐλόγως πεποιηκότες as if they had done, Lys.12.7; ὥ. ἐξόν as if it were in our power, X.An.3.1.14;

    σιωπῇ ἐδείπνουν, ὥ. τοῦτο ἐπιτεταγμένον αὐτοῖς Id.Smp.1.11

    , cf. Mem.2.3.3; with a change of construction,

    ὥ. τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦτον ἔχοντα ἀνάγκην.., καὶ οὔτε.. οἷόν τε εἴη γενέσθαι Id.HG2.3.19

    ; τὴν ὥ. ἐπὶ τοῦ δίφρου ἕδραν a seat like that used in the chariot, Id.Eq.7.5.
    III rarely of Time,
    1 ὥσπερ ἄν = ἕως ἄν, so long as, or however long (cf. ὡς Ad. 2),

    ὥσπερ ἂν ζῶ S.OC 1361

     (sed leg. ἕωσπερ).
    2 as soon as, Ar. Pax24.
    IV after a [comp] Comp. (cf. ὡς Ab. 1.4);

    οὐ μείους ὥ. χίλιοι Xenoph.3.4

    ;

    ἧττον.. ὥ. X.HG2.3.16

    .—Cf. ὡσπερεί, ὥσπερ οὖν.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥσπερ

  • 2 ἄρα

    ἄρᾰ, [dialect] Ep. [full] ῥά (which is enclitic and used after monosyllables, ἦ, ὅς, γάρ, etc., or words ending in a vowel or diphthong, e.g. ἐπεί), before a consonant [full] ἄρ (perh. cf. Lith.
    A i[rtilde] 'and'): expressing consequence, then, or mere succession, there and then, and in many derived uses.
    A EARLIER USAGE: to denote,
    I immediate transition, there and then, straightway,

    ὣς φάτο βῆ δ' ἄρ' Ὄνειρος Il.2.16

    : after a part.,

    ὣς εἰπὼν κατ' ἄρ' ἕζετο 1.68

    , al.;

    πυθόμενος.. εἶπε ἄ. Hdt.4.134

    , cf. 9.9;

    ἐρωτώσης τῆς μητρὸς ἀπεκρίνατο ἄρα X.Cyr.1.3.2

    ; with other Particles, δέ, ἦ, ὡς, etc., cf. ὁ δὲ Ἀστυάγης ἄ. εἶπεν ib.4.10: also after Advbs. of Time, τότε δή ῥα, τῆμος ἄρα, etc.;

    οὕτως ἄρα Pl.Phdr. 259b

    ; often in apodosi, as

    αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ δὴ θηήσατο.. αὐτίκ' ἄρ' ἤλυθεν Od.5.77

    ; repeated

    τὼ μὲν ἄρ'.. κεῖντο ἡ δ' ἄρ'.. ἀγόρευε Il.21.426

    : in enumerations, e. g. in Homer's catalogue, then, next,

    οἱ δ' ἄρ' Ἀθήνας εἶχον 2.546

    ; so in genealogies,

    Σίσυφος.. ὁ δ' ἄ. Γλαῦκον τέκεθ' υἱόν 6.154

    .
    2 to draw attention, mark you!

    τὸν τρεῖς μὲν ἐπιρρήσσεσκον.. τῶν ἄλλων Ἀχιλεὺς δ' ἄρ' ἐπιρρήσσεσκε καὶ οἶος 24.456

    ; with imper.,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δὴ κατ' ἄρ' ἕζευ 24.522

    : to point a moral or general statement,

    φευγόντων δ' οὔτ' ἂρ κλέος ὄρνυται οὔτε τις ἀλκή 5.532

    .
    II connexion, such as,
    1 that of antecedent and consequent,

    οἰνοχόει.. ἄσβεστος δ' ἄρ' ἐνῶρτο γέλως 1.599

    , cf. 24.507;

    τοὔνεκ' ἄρ' ἄλγε' ἔδωκε 1.96

    ; freq. with οὕνεκα in protasi, 7.140, al.: also in questions, τίς τ' ἄρ τῶν ὄχ' ἄριστος ἔην; who then (say you) was.. ? 2.761: with demonstr. Pronoun in recapitulation, ἀλλ' υἱὸν Πριάμοιο.. τόν ῥ' Ὀδυσεὺς βάλε he it was, whom.., 4.501: freq. in such phrases as

    ὣς ἄρα φωνήσας 2.35

    , al.;

    ὣς ἄρ' ἔφη 1.584

    , al.;

    ἦ ῥα 3.355

    , al., thus, then he spoke.—This usage is universal in Greek.
    2 explanation of that which precedes, χωόμενον κατὰ θυμὸν ἐϋζώνοιο γυναικὸς τήν ῥα.. ἀπηύρων whom ( and for this cause he was angry) they had taken away, 1.429; εἰ μὴ ὑπερφίαλον ἔπος ἔκβαλε.. φῆ ῥ' ἀέκητι θεῶν φυγέειν for he said, Od.4.504: freq. with οὕνεκα; so with relatives, ἐκ δ' ἔθορε κλῆρος ὃν ἄρ' ἤθελον αὐτοί the very one which.., Il.7.182.
    B LATER USAGE, always with inferential force: 1. in drawing conclusions (more subjective than οὖν)

    , ἄριστον ἄ. ἡ εὐδαιμονία Arist.EN 1099a24

    ;

    δῆλον ἄ. Id.Pol. 1295b33

    ; in pseudo-syllogistic conclusions, Id.SE 174b11, Rh. 1401a3, al.: esp. by way of informal inference, as it seems,

    οὐκ ἄ. σοί γε πατὴρ ἦν Πηλεύς Il.16.33

    ;

    οὐδ' ἄ. πως ἦν ἐν πάντεσσ' ἔργοισι δαήμονα φῶτα γενέσθαι 23.670

    ;

    μάτην ἄρ', ὡς ἔοικεν, ἥκομεν S.El. 772

    ; οὕτω κοινόν τι ἄ. χαρᾷ καὶ λύπῃ δάκρυά ἐστιν so true is it that.., X.HG7.1.32;

    πολὺ γὰρ ἀμείνων ἄ. ὁ τοῦ ἀδίκου ἢ ὁ τοῦ δικαίου βίος Pl.R. 358c

    ;

    ἦν ἄ. πυρός γ' ἕτερα.. θερμότερα Ar.Eq. 382

    ;

    ὦ τλῆμον ἀρετή, λόγος ἄρ' ἦσθα Trag.Adesp.374

    ; so in announcing the discovery or correction of an error, as οὐκ ἐννενοήκαμεν ὅτι εἰσὶν ἄ. .. Pl.R. 375d; φαίνεται πρὸ ποδῶν ἡμῖν κυλινδεῖσθαι καὶ οὐχ ἑωρῶμεν ἄρ' αὐτό ib. 432d; εἰκότως ἄ. οὐκ ἐγίγνετο· ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ νῦν πυνθάνομαι.. X.An.2.2.3.
    2 in questions, expressing the anxiety of the questioner, τίς ἄ. ῥύσεται; who is there to save ? A.Th.92; so in exclamations to heighten the expression of emotion, οἵαν ἄρ' ἥβην.. ἀπώλεσεν what a band of youth was that.. ! Id.Pers. 733; so ὡς ἄρα ib. 472, S.Fr. 577;

    τί μ' ἄ. τί μ' ὀλέκεις; Id.Ant. 1285

    ;

    τί οὖν.. ἄ. X.Oec.6.2

    ; πῶς ἄ.; οὕτως ἄ., etc.; ἄ. alone,

    ἔζης ἄ. S.Fr. 686

    : esp. in ironical comments, Ar.Av. 476, 1371, etc.
    3 epexegetic, namely, ἐρῶ, ὡς ἄ. .. Pl.Tht. 152d, cf. 156e.
    4 for τοι ἄρα, τἄρα, v. sub τοι 11.2.
    5 εἰ (or ἐάν) μὴ ἄ. unless perhaps, Pl.Ap. 38b, D.58.4; separated from εἰ μή, Id.9.20; with irony,

    εἰ μὴ ἄ. ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    .
    6 in hypothetical clauses, to indicate the improbability of the supposition,

    ἢν ἄ. ποτὲ κατὰ γῆν βιασθῶσιν Th.1.93

    , etc.; or simply, perhaps (sts. separated from εἰ)

    , εἴ τις οὖν ὑμῶν ἄ... ὑπελάμβανεν D.21.8

    ;

    εἴ τις ἰδίᾳ τινὰ δεδιὼς ἄ. ἀπρόθυμός ἐστιν Th.4.86

    .
    C IN CRASIS, freq. τἄρα, μεντἄρα, οὐτἄρα: also δήξομἄρα for δήξομαι ἄ., Ar.Ach. 325; οἰμώξετἄρα, κλαύσἄρα, Id.Th. 248, Pax 532: also in Trag., E.Hyps.Fr.34.86.
    D ἄρα never stands first in the sentence in Classical Greek (Arist.Mech. 851a22 is corrupt), but is found at the beginning of an apodosis in Ev.Matt.12.28, Ep.Rom.10.17, and first in a sentence, Ev.Luc.11.48, Vett.Val.305.20; in conclusion of syllogism, Herm. ap.Stob.3.11.31.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄρα

  • 3 ἔπειτα

    ἔπειτα, [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Dor. [full] ἔπειτε( [full] ν) (q.v.), Adv., ([etym.] ἐπί, εἶτα):
    I of mere Sequence, without any notion of cause, thereupon, thereafter, then, freq. from Hom. downwds., as Il.1.48, 2.169, etc.: when in strong opposition to the former act or state, with past tenses, thereafter, afterwards; with future, hereafter,

    ἢ πέφατ' ἢ καὶ ἔ. πεφήσεται Il.15.140

    ; opp. αὐτίκα νῦν, 23.551; ὃς δ' ἔπειτ' ἔφυ, opp. ὅστις πάροιθεν ἦν, A.Ag. 171 (lyr.): in Hom.freq. with other Advs.,

    αὐτίκ' ἔ. Il.5.214

    ; αἶψα, ὦκα ἔ., 24.783, 18.527; even

    ἔνθα.. ἔ. Od.10.297

    ;

    δὴ ἔ. 8.378

    : usu. with reference to a former act, just then, at the time, 1.106; freq. in narrative,

    πρῶτα μὲν.., αὐτὰρ ἔ. Il.16.497

    ; πρῶτον μέν.., folld. by ἔ. δέ.., Th.2.55, Pl.Ap. 18a, etc.; by ἔ. alone, Th.1.33, etc.; by ἔ. δέ.. ἔ. δέ.. ἔ..., X.Cyr.1.3.14; ἐπεὶ δέ.. ἔ... ἔ... ἔ. δέ, ib.8.3.24, al.;

    πρὶν μέν.., ἔ. δέ.. S.El. 724

    ;

    ἔ. γε Pl.Tht. 147c

    , etc., f.l. in Ar.Th. 556; κἄπειτα, freq. in Trag., S.Aj.61, 305, etc.
    2 c. Art., τὸ ἔ. what follows,

    τό τ' ἔ. καὶ τὸ μέλλον καὶ τὸ πρίν Id.Ant. 611

     (lyr.);

    τά τε πρῶτα, τά τ' ἔ., ὅσα τ' ἔμελλε τυχεῖν E.IT 1265

     (lyr.);

    οἱ ἔ.

     future generations,

    A.Eu. 672

    ;

    ὁ ἔ. βίος Pl.Phd. 116a

    ;

    εἰς τὸν ἔ. χρόνον Id.Phlb. 39e

    , X.Cyr.1.5.9, OGI90.43 (Rosetta, ii B.C.);

    ἡ ἐς τὸ ἔ. δόξα Th.2.64

    ;

    ἐν τῷ ἔ. Pl.Phd. 67d

    ;

    ἐκ τοῦ ποτὲ εἰς τὸ ἔ. Id.Prm. 152b

    .
    3 like εἶτα, with a finite Verb after a participle, μειδήσασα δ' ἔ. ἑῷ ἐγκάτθετο κόλπῳ she smiled and then placed it in her bosom, Il.14.223, cf. 11.730, etc.: freq. in Trag. and [dialect] Att., A.Th. 267, Eu.29, Pl.Phd. 82c: so freq. when part. and Verb are opposed, marking surprise or the like , and then, and yet, nevertheless,

    τὸ μητρὸς αἷμα.. ἐκχέας πέδοι ἔ. δώματ' οἰκήσει πατρός; A.Eu. 654

    , cf. 438;

    χὤταν ἐν κακοῖσί τις ἁλοὺς ἔ. τοῦτο καλλύνειν θέλῃ S.Ant. 496

    ;

    ὅστις ἀνθρώπου φύσιν βλαστὼν ἔ. μὴ κατ' ἄνθρωπον φρονῇ Id.Aj. 761

    ;

    εἰ πτωχὸς ὢν ἔπειτ' ἐν Ἀθηναίοις λέγειν μέλλω Ar.Ach. 498

    , cf. Av.29, Pl.Grg. 519e, Prt. 319d: adversatively, answering

    μέν, πολλάκις μὲν ὥρμα.., ἔ... διεκωλύετο Id.R. 336b

    ;

    ἔτι μὲν ἐνεχείρησα.., ἔ... Id.Prt. 310c

    , etc.; also κἄπειτα after a part., Ar.Nu. 624, Av. 536; cf.

    εἶτα 1.2

    .
    4 in apodosi (never at the beginning of the clause; in Hom. freq. strengthd. by other Particles):
    a after a Temporal Conj., then, thereafter, ἐπεὶ δὴ σφαίρῃ πειρήσαντο, ὀρχείσθην δὴ ἔ. when they had done playing at ball, then they danced, Od.8.378; after ἐπεί, Il.16.247;

    ἐπὴν.. δὴ ἔ. Od.11.121

    ; ὁπότε, Il.18.545; ὅτε, 3.223;

    ὡς.. ἄρ' ἔ. 10.522

    ;

    ἦμος.. καὶ τότ' ἔ. 1.478

    .
    b after a Conditional Conj., then surely, εἰ δ' ἐτεὸν δὴ.. ἀγορεύεις, ἐξ ἄρα δή τοι ἔ. θεοὶ φρένας ὤλεσαν if thou speakest sooth, then of a surety have the gods infatuated thee, 7.360, cf. 10.453, Od.1.290, etc.; so after ἤν, Il.9.394; also when the apodosis takes the form of a question, εἰ μὲν δὴ ἕταρόν γε κελεύετέ μ' αὐτὸν ἑλέσθαι, πῶς ἂν ἔ. Ὀδυσῆος λαθοίμην; how can I in such a case? 10.243; when a condition is implied in relat. Pron., ὃν ( = εἴ τινα)

    μέν κ' ἐπιεικὲς ἀκουέμεν, οὔ τις ἔ. τόν γ' εἴσεται 1.547

    ; ὃν ( = εἴ τινα)

    δέ κ' ἐγὼν ἀπάνευθε μάχης ἐθέλοντα νοήσω μιμνάζειν, οὔ οἱ ἔ. ἄρκιον ἐσσεῖται 2.392

    .
    II of Sequence in thought, i.e. Consequence or Inference, then, therefore,

    ξεῖν', ἐπεὶ ἂρ δὴ ἔ... μενεαίνεις Od.17.185

    , cf. Il.15.49, 18.357;

    οὐ σύ γ' ἔ. Τυδέος ἔκγονός ἐσσι 5.812

    ; rarely at the beginning,

    ἔπειθ' ἑλοῦ γε θάτερα S.El. 345

    .
    2 in telling a story, νῆσος ἔ. τις ἔστι now, there is an island, Od.4.354, cf. 9.116.
    3 in [dialect] Att. freq. to introduce emphatic questions, why then.. ?

    ἔ. τοῦ δέει; Ar.Pl. 827

    , cf. Th. 188, Nu. 226; mostly to express surprise, or to sneer, and so forsooth..? and so really..? ἔ. οὐκ οἴει φροντίζειν [τοὺς θεοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων]; X.Mem.1.4.11; so

    κἄπειτα E. Med. 1398

     (anap.), Ar.Ach. 126, Av. 963, X.Smp.4.2; freq. with δῆτα added,

    ἔ. δῆτα δοῦλος ὢν κόμην ἔχεις; Ar.Av. 911

    , cf. 1217, Lys. 985, E.Alc. 822.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἔπειτα

  • 4 ἔνθα

    ἔνθα: I. demonstr., there, thither, then; of place, usually denoting rest, Il. 1.536, Od. 3.365; less often direction, ἔνθ' ἐλθών, Il. 13.23; ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα, ‘here and there,’ ‘to and fro,’ ‘in length and breadth,’ Il. 2.476, , Od. 2.213, Il. 7.156, Od. 10.517; ἢ ἔνθ' ἢ ἔνθα κίοντα, ‘going or coming,’ Od. 10.574; often temporal, thereupon, ἔνθα ἔπειτα, Od. 10.297; ἔνθ' αὖ, Il. 5.1; introducing apodosis, Il. 2.308.— II. relative, where, Il. 1.610 ; ἔνθ' ἄρα, Od. 22.335; ἔνθα περ, Od. 13.284; ἔνθα τε, ν 1, Il. 2.594.

    A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ἔνθα

  • 5 δέ

    δέ (Hom.+) one of the most common Gk. particles, used to connect one clause to another, either to express contrast or simple continuation. When it is felt that there is some contrast betw. clauses—though the contrast is oft. scarcely discernible—the most common translation is ‘but’. When a simple connective is desired, without contrast being clearly implied, ‘and’ will suffice, and in certain occurrences the marker may be left untranslated (Denniston 162–89; Schwyzer 2, 562; B-D-F §447).—Usually δέ comes second in its clause, somet. third (Menand., Epitr. 355 S. [=179 Kö.]; Lucian, Tim. 48, Dial. Mar. 4, 2; Alex. Aphr., Fat. 36, II 2 p. 208, 20; 209, 6) Mt 10:11; 18:25; Mk 4:34; Lk 10:31; Ac 17:6; 28:6 al., occasionally fourth (Menand., Epitr. 281 S. [105 Kö.]; Archimed. II 150, 10 Heib.; Lucian, Adv. Ind. 19 p. 114; PHib 54, 20 [245 B.C.]; Wsd 16:8; 1 Macc 8:27; 4 Macc 2:15) Mt 10:18; J 6:51; 8:16; 1 Cor 4:18; 1J 1:3, or even fifth (Lucian, Apol. 12 p. 722; Alex. Aphr., An. II, 1 p. 34, 8; 57, 15; 1 Esdr 1:22; 4 Macc 2:9) J 8:17; 1J 2:2; IEph 4:2.
    ① a marker connecting a series of closely related data or lines of narrative, and, as for. Freq. used in lists of similar things, with a slight call of attention to the singularity of each item (cp. Hom., Il. 3, 144–48).—In tightly knit lists Mt 1:2–16; 2 Pt 1:5–8; relating one teaching to another (in this respect δέ is similar to the use in 2) Mt 5:31; 6:16; Ro 14:1; 1 Cor 7:1; 8:1; 12:1; 15:1; 16:1. Freq. w. the art. in narrative to mark change in the dramatis personae, e.g. Mt 14:17f, Mk 14:31.
    ② a marker linking narrative segments, now, then, and, so, that is Mt 1:18, 24; 2:19; 3:1; 8:30; Mk 5:11; 7:24; 16:9; Lk 3:21; 12:2, 11, 13, 15f, 50; 13:1, 6, 10; 15:1, 11 al.; Ac 4:5; 6:1, 8; 9:10; 12:10, 17, 20; 23:10; 24:17; Ro 8:28; 14:1 (s. 1 above); 16:1; 1 Cor 16:12, 17; 2 Cor 4:7; 8:1; Gal 3:23. Esp. to insert an explanation that is (Aeschyl., Choeph. 190) Ro 3:22; 9:30; 1 Cor 10:11; 15:56; Eph 5:32; Phil 2:8. So in parentheses (Thu. 1, 26, 5 ἔστι δὲ ἰσθμὸς τὸ χωρίον al.) ἦσαν δὲ ἡμέραι τῶν ἀζύμων Ac 12:3. Freq. to indicate change of speaker, e.g. Mk 15:12–14; Lk 18:19–23; 20:3–5; 22:33–34.—Resuming a discourse that has been interrupted (Thu. 2, 36, 1; Theocr. 5, 104 after the parenthetical 100–103) Mt 3:4; Lk 4:1; Ro 5:8; 2 Cor 10:2.
    ③ a marker with an additive relation, with possible suggestion of contrast, at the same time Παῦλος δοῦλος θεοῦ ἀπόστολος δὲ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Paul, God’s slave, and at the same time apostle of Jesus Christ Tit 1:1.
    ④ marker of contrast, but, on the other hand,
    ⓐ adversative function gener. Mt 6:1, 6, 15, 16, 17; 8:20; 9:17; 23:25; Mk 2:21f; Lk 5:36f; 10:6; 12:9f; 13:9; 1 Cor 2:15 and oft.
    ⓑ for correlative use μέν … δέ s. μέν.
    ⓒ after a negative rather (Wsd 2:11; 4:9; 7:6 al.; 2 Macc 4:5; 5:6 al.; 3 Macc 2:24; 3:15) Mt 6:33; Lk 10:20; Ac 12:9, 14; Ro 3:4; Eph 4:15; Hb 4:13, 15; 6:12; 9:12; intensified δὲ μᾶλλον 12:13; Mt 10:6, 28.
    ⓓ introducing an apodosis after a hypothetical or temporal protasis, and contrasting it with the protasis (Kühner-G. II 275f; Epict. 1, 4, 32; 1 Macc 14:29; 2 Macc 1:34; AcThom 98 [Aa II/2, p. 210, 25]) Ac 11:17 v.l.; 2 Pt 1:5 (for the protasis vs. 3f); Col 1:22 (where the participial constr. vs. 21 represents the protasis; EpArist 175; 315).
    ⑤ marker of heightened emphasis, in combination w. καί but also
    ⓐ δὲ καί but also, but even (2 Macc 12:13; 15:19; EpArist 40 al.; TestJob 15:8 al.) Mt 3:10 v.l.; 10:30; 18:17; so also, similarly, likewise, too Lk 11:18; ἀπέθανεν δὲ καὶ ὁ πλούσιος= the rich man died too 16:22; 22:68 v.l.; J 2:2; 3:23; 18:2, 5; Ac 22:28; 1 Cor 15:15; Papias (4).—ἔτι δὲ καί and (even) (EpJer 40; 2 Macc 10:7; EpArist 35; 151) Lk 14:26 v.l.; Ac 2:26 (Ps 15:9)
    ⓑ καὶ … δέ and also, but also (Kühner-G. II 253; Wsd 7:3; 11:20; 1 Esdr 1:47; 1 Macc 12:23; 2 Macc 11:12; 4 Macc 2:9; EpArist index) Mt 10:18; 16:18; J 6:51; 8:16f; 15:27; Ac 3:24; 22:29; 1 Ti 3:10; 2 Ti 3:12; 1J 1:3. Cp. Hatch 141f.—Epict. index p. 542 Sch.; s. the grammars and Aland, Vollst. Konk.; HMeecham, The Letter of Aristeas ’35, 136; 154f.—EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δέ

  • 6 περιπατέω

    περιπατέω impf. περιεπάτουν; fut. περιπατήσω; 1 aor. περιεπάτησα and ἐπεριπάτησα ApcEsdr s. 1a; plpf. 3 sg. περι(ε)πεπατήκει Ac 14:8 v.l. (on augm. in the plpf. s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt.-H. 190f) (Aristoph., X., Pla.+)
    ① to go here and there in walking, go about, walk around
    ⓐ w. an indication of the place where one walks about (Demosth. 54, 7 ἐν ἀγορᾷ; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 Tdf. ἐν τῷ ὄρει; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 117 ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; Just.. D. 1, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ ξυστοῦ περιπάτοις ‘on the walkways of the Xystos’) ἐν τριβόλοις γυμνοῖς ποσὶ περιπατεῖν walk among thistles barefoot Hs 9, 20, 3. ἐν τῇ γῇ ταύτῃ GJs 6:1. In several places one might translate stay, spend some time, be, though without the idea of remaining on the same spot (Chion, Ep. 13, 1 ἐν τῷ Ὠιδείῳ; 2 Km 11:2; Da 3:92 of the men in the fiery furnace; 4:29; En 17:6; Jos., Ant. 7, 130): ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ (Cebes 1, 1.—Diog. L. 4, 24 refers to Crantor walking about in the temple of Asclepius) Mk 11:27; J 10:23; Ox 840, 9. ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ J 7:1a; cp. vs. 1b. ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἑπτὰ λυχνιῶν Rv 2:1. π. ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις appear among the Judeans J 11:54.
    ⓑ go about w. indication of the way one is clothed ἐν στολαῖς Mk 12:38; Lk 20:46. ἐν λευκοῖς clothed in white Rv 3:4 (Epict. 3, 22, 10 ἐν κοκκίνοις περιπ.; Tat. 2:1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν). ἐν δέρμασιν αἰγείοις 1 Cl 17:1.
    ⓒ gener. walk, go π. διὰ τοῦ φωτός walk in the light Rv 21:24. π. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν (go for a) walk in the country Hs 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης (ἐπί 1a and cp. Job 9:8.—GBertram, Le chemin sur les eaux: Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. I 1928, 137–66) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19. AcPl Ha 7, 27 and 34. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Mt 14:25; J 6:19 P75. ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα Mt 14:29 (ἐπί 4bβ). παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 4:18 (παρά C1a). π. μετά τινος go about w. someone J 6:66; walk with someone Hs 9, 6, 2a; 9, 10, 1. π. περί τι walk around someth. Hs 9, 12, 7; also κύκλῳ τινός Hs 9, 6, 2b. μετά τινος κύκλῳ τινὸς π. walk with someone around someth. Hs 9, 11, 5. π. ἐπάνω walk over Lk 11:44 (ἐπάνω 1a). More closely defined ὁμαλῶς π. καὶ ἀπροσκόπως Hm 6, 1, 4. γυμνὸν π. go naked Rv 16:15. μόνον π. walk alone Hv 4, 1, 3 (cp. Jos., C. Ap. 1, 281). περιεπάτεις ὅπου ἤθελες you used to go where you pleased J 21:18 (En 17:6 ὅπου πᾶσα σὰρξ οὐ περιπατεῖ).—Abs. walk (about) (Diocles 141 p. 180, 19f; Diod S 1, 70, 10; EpArist 175; Just., D. 127, 2) Mt 9:5; 11:5; 15:31; Mk 2:9; 5:42; 8:24; Lk 5:23; 7:22; J 5:8f, 11f; 11:9f; Ac 3:6, 8ab, 9, 12; 14:8, 10; 1 Pt 5:8; Rv 9:20 (cp. Ps 113:15); Hv 2, 1, 3; (go for a) walk, be out walking Mk 16:12; Lk 24:17; walk by J 1:36. περιπατῶν ἀφύπνωσα as I walked along I fell asleep Hv 1, 1, 3. περιπατῶν ἀνεμνήσθην as I was walking along I remembered 2, 1, 1.
    ⓓ in imagery, and far on the way toward the nonliteral use of the word: doubters are περιπατοῦντες ἐν ταῖς ἀνοδίαις Hv 3, 7, 1. Esp. in John: περιπατεῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ J 8:12; 12:35b; 1J 2:11; cp. 1:6. Corresp. ἐν τῷ φωτί vs. 7; ἐν αὐτῇ (=ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ φωτός) B 19:1 (but it may also refer to ἡ γνῶσις; then the pass. would belong under 2aδ below). μέγα δὲ ἀσεβείας ὑπόδειγμα ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κόσμῳ περιεπάτησεν ὁ Ἰούδας Judas went about in this world as a notable example of impiety Papias (3:2). Abs. περιπατεῖτε ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε walk while you have the light J 12:35a.
    ② to conduct one’s life, comport oneself, behave, live as habit of conduct; fig. ext. of 1:
    ⓐ of ‘walk of life’, go about (Philod., Περὶ παρρησίας p. 12 Ol.; Epict. 1, 18, 20; s. Simplicius in Epict. p. 125, 52 Düb. Esp. acc. to OT models: 4 Km 20:3 ἐν ἀληθείᾳ; Pr 8:20 ἐν ὁδοῖς δικαιοσύνης.—Eccl 11:9). In the NT this use of the word is decidedly Pauline (the pastoral epp. do not have the word at all); elsewh. it is reasonably common only in 2J and 3J, live, conduct oneself, walk, always more exactly defined
    α. by an adv. ἀξίως τινός Eph 4:1; Col 1:10; 1 Th 2:12; Pol 5:1. ἀτάκτως 2 Th 3:6, 11. εὐσχημόνως Ro 13:13; 1 Th 4:12.
    β. by the dat. to denote attendant circumstance, kind, or manner (TestIss 5:8 ἁπλότητι.—B-D-F §198, 5; s. Rob. 528–32) κώμοις καὶ μέθαις Ro 13:13. τοῖς ἔθεσιν Ac 21:21; cp. 15:1 D; πνεύματι π. Gal 5:16. τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι 2 Cor 12:18.
    γ. by a comparison ἕκαστον ὡς κέκληκεν ὁ θεός, οὕτως περιπατείτω 1 Cor 7:17. περιπατεῖν καθὼς τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ Eph 4:17; ὡς τέκνα φωτός 5:8.—Phil 3:17; 1J 2:6. The comparison is implied fr. the context (ὡς ἐχθροὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ) Phil 3:18.—πῶς (καθὼς) περιπατεῖτε Eph 5:15; 1 Th 4:1ab.
    δ. by a prepositional expr. The sphere in which one lives or ought to live, so as to be characterized by that sphere, is designated by ἐν: pl. in sins Eph 2:2; Col 3:7; in good deeds Eph 2:10; in the Lord’s ordinances B 21:1 (Philo, Congr. Erud. Gr. 87 π. ἐν ταῖς τοῦ θεοῦ κρίσεσι κ. προστάξεσιν). Cp. Hb 13:9. Sing. ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς Ro 6:4. ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ Eph 5:2. ἐν σοφίᾳ Col 4:5. ἐν (τῇ) ἀληθείᾳ 2J 4; 3J 3f; ἐν ἀκεραιοσύνῃ B 10:4; cp. B 19:1 (s. 1d above). ἐν ἀλλοτρίᾳ γνώμῃ IPhld 3:3. ἐν ἀμώμῳ … συνειδήσει Pol 5:3. ἐν αὐτῇ (=ἐν τῇ ἐντολῇ) 2J 6b. ἐν αὐτῷ (=ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ) Col 2:6.—The norm of conduct is designated by κατὰ w. acc. (s. κατά B5bγ) κατὰ ἄνθρωπον like ordinary (unregenerate) persons 1 Cor 3:3. κατὰ σάρκα according to the old self viz. the ‘flesh’ as opposed to the new self under the ‘spirit’ Ro 8:4; 2 Cor 10:2. κατὰ ἀγάπην Ro 14:15. κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων Mk 7:5. κατὰ τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ 2J 6a.—BEaston, NT Ethical Lists: JBL 51, ’32, 1–12; SWibbing, D. Tugend-u. Lasterkataloge im NT, ’59; EKamlach, Die Form der katalogischen Paränese im NT, ’64; HBraun, Qumran u. das NT II, ’66, 286–301; JHolloway III, ΠΕΡΙΠΑΤΕΩ as a Thematic Marker for Pauline Ethics ’92.
    ⓑ rarely of physical life gener.: ἐν τούτῳ τῶ κόσμῳ περιπατεῖν (formulation as in Papias [3:2]) B 10:11. ἐν σαρκί 2 Cor 10:3. διὰ πίστεως περιπατοῦμεν, οὐ διὰ εἴδους 5:7.—B. 690. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > περιπατέω

  • 7 εἰ

    1
    εἰ (Hom.+)
    ① marker of a condition, existing in fact or hypothetical, if (B-D-F §371f, neg. §428, 1; 2; Rob., indexes; JBoyer, Grace Theological Journal 2, ’81, 75–141, marker of a ‘simple, logical connection between protasis and apodosis’).
    ⓐ w. the indic.
    α. in all tenses, to express a condition thought of as real or to denote assumptions relating to what has already happened εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ if you really are the Son of God Mt 4:3; sim. 5:29f; 6:23; 8:31; Ac 5:39. εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ if you call yourself a Judean Ro 2:17. εἰ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ βαστάζεις if you do boast, (remember) you do not support 11:18 al. In Paul the verb is freq. missing, and is to be supplied fr. the context: εἰ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν (sc. ἐστιν), τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρόν (sc. ἐστιν) 8:10. εἰ τέκνα (sc. ἐστέ) if you are children, then … vs. 17, εἰ χάριτι (γέγονεν), οὐκέτι ἐξ ἔργων 11:6 al. The negative in clauses where the reality of the condition is taken for granted is οὐ (earlier Gk. μή [for exception s. Goodwin p. 138f]; s. B-D-F §428, 1): εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν Mt 26:42. εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε Mk 11:25 [26] v.l. εἰ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε Lk 16:11f; εἰ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν vs. 31. εἰ οὐ φοβοῦμαι Lk 18:4; cp. J 5:47; 10:37; Ro 8:9; 11:21; 1 Cor 7:9; 9:2; 11:6; 15:13ff, 29, 32; 16:22 al. εἰ is rarely found w. the future εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται Mt 26:33; Mk 14:29; εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 2 Ti 2:12 (cp. Just., A I, 31, 6 εἰ μὴ ἀρνοῖντο Ἰησοῦν); εἰ ὑπομενεῖτε 1 Pt 2:20; εἰ καὶ οὐ δώσει (class. ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δῷ B-D-F §372, 3; Rob. 1012) Lk 11:8. W. aor., when events are regarded as having taken place Mt 24:22; Mk 3:26; 13:20.
    β. w. the pres., impf., aor., or plpf. indic. to express an unreal (contrary to fact) condition (B-D-F §360; 372; Rob. 1012ff). ἄν is usu. found in the apodosis (regularly in class.) εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σίδωνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν μετενόησαν if the wonders had been done in T. and S., they would have repented long ago Mt 11:21. εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers 23:30. εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης if the master of the house had known 24:43 (cp. Just., A I, 12, 2 εἰ … ταῦτα ἐγίνωσκον; 18, 1 al.) εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would know Lk 7:39 al. The pres. indic. εἰ ἔχετε (v.l. εἴχετε) πίστιν … ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith … you would say Lk 17:6. Somet. ἄν is lacking in the apodosis (Polyaenus 2, 3, 5 εἰ ἐπεποιήκειμεν … νῦν ἐχρῆν=if we had done … it would have been necessary; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 16, 18 [II B.C.]; PRein I, 7 [II B.C.]; POxy 526, 10; 530, 8 and 17; Just., A I, 10, 6; 11:2 al.—PMelcher, De sermone Epict., diss. Halle 1905, 75; Mlt. 200f) εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο if this man were not from God, he would not have been able to … J 9:33. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν if I had not come, they would not have sin 15:22; cp. vs. 24. W. the apodosis placed first Mk 9:42 (v.l. περιέκειτο), Lk 17:2; J 19:11.
    ⓑ εἰ w. subj., as καὶ εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 (s. 7 below), is unusual, perh. a textual error; B-D-F §372, 3 conjectures κἄν for καὶ εἰ. But εἰ w. subj. is found in the older poets and Hdt. (Kühner-G. II 474), in Aristoph., Equ. 698 et al., in var. dialects (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I 1912, 277f) and in later times (e.g. Epict., Vett. Val., Lucian [ed. CJacobitz, Index graec. 473a]; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. p. 84, 28; 197, 9; ins [Rdm.2 199]; PRyl 234, 12; POxy 496, 11; Dt 8:5); B-D-F §372, 3; Mlt. 187; Reinhold 107; OSchulthess, AKaegi Festschr. 1919, 161f.
    ⓒ εἰ w. the optative is rare: εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε … μακάριοι even if you should suffer, … you would be blessed 1 Pt 3:14. εἰ θέλοι (v.l. θέλει) τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ if it should be God’s will vs. 17. εἴ τι ἔχοιεν (sc. κατηγορεῖν; cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 εἰ … μηδὲν ἔχοι τις ἐλέγχειν) πρὸς ἐμέ if they should have any charges to bring against me Ac 24:19. εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη (Jos., Ant. 12, 12) if it should be possible 20:16 (but s. B-D-F §385, 2; Just., A II, 15, 2 εἰ δύναιντο). εἰ τύχοι is used as a formula (oft. in later wr., incl. Philo; s. KReik, D. Opt. bei Polyb. u. Philo 1907, 154; Just., A I, 27, 3) it may be, for example, perhaps 1 Cor 15:37; used to tone down an assertion which may be too bold 14:10 (Lucian, Icar. 6 καὶ πολλάκις, εἰ τύχοι, μηδὲ ὁπόσοι στάδιοι Μεγαρόθεν Ἀθήναζέ εἰσιν, ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι ‘and many times, so it appears, not even knowing how many stades it is from Megara to Athens’).
    ② marker of an indirect question as content, that (Kühner-G. II 369, 8; Rob. 965. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 67 §283 ἀγανακτέω εἰ=be exasperated that; Sir 23:14 θελήσεις εἰ μὴ ἐγεννήθης; 2 Macc 14:28; 4 Macc 2:1; 4:7. S. on θαυμάζω 1aγ) ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν he was surprised that he was already dead Mk 15:44a. μὴ θαυμάζετε εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος do not wonder that the world hates you 1J 3:13; θαυμαζόντων …, εἰ τοσαύτη σπουδὴ ἦν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι that there was such interest in arresting MPol 7:2; AcPlCor 2:2 (cp. Just., A II, 8, 3 οὐδὲν … θαυμαστόν, εἰ). Sim. also (Procop. Soph., Ep. 123 χάριν ἔχειν εἰ=that) μαρτυρόμενος … εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός testifying … that the Christ was to suffer (s. πάσχω 3aα) Ac 26:23.—οὐ μέγα εἰ it is not surprising that 2 Cor 11:15 (cp. Aeschin., In Ctes. 94 ἐστὶ δεινὸν εἰ; Diod S 23, 15, 5, παράδοξον … εἰ=incredible … that; ibid. θαυμαστὸν εἰ; Gen 45:28 μέγα μοί ἐστιν εἰ).— That is also poss. after verbs of knowing or not knowing, e.g. J 9:25; Ac 19:2b; 1 Cor 1:16; 7:16; so CBurchard, ZNW 52, ’61, 73–82 but s. 5bα.
    ③ marker in causal clauses, when an actual case is taken as a supposition, where we also can use if instead of since: εἰ τὸν χόρτον … ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν if God so clothes the grass Mt 6:30; Lk 12:28; cp. Mt 7:11; Lk 11:13; J 7:23; 10:35; 13:14, 17, 32; Ac 4:9; 11:17; Ro 6:8; 15:27; Col 2:20; Hb 7:15; 1 Pt 1:17; 1J 4:11.
    ④ marker of strong or solemn assertion, without apodosis (=in aposiopesis; B-D-F §482; Rob. 1203) εἰ ἔγνως if you only knew Lk 19:42. εἰ βούλει παρενέγκαι if you would only let (this) pass 22:42 v.l. (cp. the letter fr. IV B.C. in Dssm., LO 120, note 5 [LAE 149]).—Hebraistic in oaths, like אִם: may this or that happen to me, if … (cp. 2 Km 3:25; GBuchanan, HTR 58, ’65, 319–24); this amounts to a strong negation certainly not (cp. Ps 7:4f; Gen 14:23) ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν εἰ δοθήσεται truly, I tell you, it will not be given Mk 8:12 (NColeman, JTS 28, 1927, 159–67 interprets this as strongly positive; against him FBurkitt, ibid. 274–76). εἰ εἰσελεύσονται they shall certainly not enter Hb 3:11; 4:3, 5 (all 3 Ps 94:11); B-D-F §372, 4; 454, 5; Mlt-H. 468f; Rob. 94; 1024.
    ⑤ marker of direct and indirect questions (without particle following)
    ⓐ (not in earlier Gk., B-D-F §440, 3; Rob. 916) w. direct questions (Gen 17:17; 44:19; Am 3:3–6; 6:12; TestAbr A 15 p.96, 8 [Stone p. 40]; 18 p. 100, 13 [St. p. 48]): εἰ ἔξεστιν; is it permitted, may one? Mt 12:10; 19:3 (cp. Mk 10:2); Lk 14:3 v.l.; Ac 21:37; 22:25. εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; are there only a few who will be saved? Lk 13:23; cp. Mk 8:23; Lk 22:49; Ac 1:6; 7:1; 19:2a. Cp. 6aβ.
    ⓑ freq. in indir. questions whether (Hom. et al.)
    α. w. pres. indic. (Gen 27:21; 42:16; TestJob 31:1; Jos., Ant. 10, 259; 16, 225; Ar 8, 1; Just., A I, 2, 2; A II, 2, 10) εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός whether you are the Christ Mt 26:63. εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν whether he is a sinner J 9:25; εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν whether there is a holy spirit Ac 19:2b (s. 2 above). ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται Mt 27:49; Mk 15:36 (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 20, 3 φέρʼ ἴδω εἰ=let me see whether, Merc. Cond. 6); cp. Mk 10:2; Lk 14:31; 1 Cor 3:12; 2 Cor 13:5; 1J 4:1.—W. the fut. indic. (4 Km 1:2; Job 5:1) εἰ θεραπεύσει αὐτόν whether he would heal him Mk 3:2 (v.l. θεραπεύει); Lk 6:7 v.l.; εἰ σώσεις whether you will save 1 Cor 7:16.—W. the aor. indic. (Esth 4:14; w. plpf. Just., D. 56, 2) εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν whether he had already died Mk 15:44b; εἰ ἐβάπτισα 1 Cor 1:16.
    β. w. subj. διώκω εἰ καταλάβω I press on (to see) whether I can capture Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §368; 375; Rob. 1017).
    γ. w. opt. (X., An. 1, 8, 15; 2, 1, 15; 4 Macc 9:27; 11:13) ἀνακρίνοντες … εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα examining … to see whether this was really so Ac 17:11. εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι 25:20; cp. 17:27.
    ⑥ In combination w. other particles, w. the other particles foll.
    ⓐ εἰ ἄρα
    α. expressing possibility if, indeed; if, in fact; whether (perhaps) (X., An. 3, 2, 22; SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; AcPt Ox 849, 6.
    β. introducing a direct question εἰ ἄρα ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; is it (really) so? Ac 7:1 v.l.; indirect qu. on the chance that (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9 ‘should you find it impossible’; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; in the hope that 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); AcPt Ox 849, 2; 22. Cp. εἰ δέ … ; What if …? Ac 23:9.
    ⓑ εἴ γε if indeed, inasmuch as (Kühner-G. II 177c) Eph 3:2; 4:21; Col 1:23. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ; εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ have you experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain Gal 3:4. εἴ γε καὶ ἐκδυσάμενοι οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα assuming, of course, that having put it off we shall not be found naked 2 Cor 5:3. [εἴ γ]ε οὕτως ὡς [ἔστιν καὶ παρελάβετε τὸν λόγον] AcPl BMM recto, 31f (restoration based on duplicate Ox 1602 verso, 37f and AcPl Ha 8, 24f, which has a slightly difft. text after εἴ γε [s. also the text of Ghent 62, 17 in HSanders, HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2]). S. γέ bα.
    ⓒ εἰ δὲ καί (Just., D. 110, 1) but if, and if Lk 11:18; 1 Cor 4:7; and even if 2 Cor 4:3 (but s. Lietzmann, Hdb.); 11:6. If, on the other hand, … then AcPlCor 2:28 (εἰ … δέ … καί … μή).
    ⓓ εἰ δὲ μή (γε) if not, otherwise
    α. after affirmat. clauses, w. the aor. ind, and ἄν in the apodosis J 14:2; or pres. ind. (Demosth., Prooem. 29, 3) and fut. (Gen 30:1; Bel 29 Theod.; PLond 1912, 98) Rv 2:5, 16; or pres. impv. J 14:11.—εἰ δὲ μή γε (μήγε some edd.) otherwise (Pla. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 27; Jos., Bell. 6, 120, Ant. 17, 113; Just., D. 105, 6; IGR IV, 833; POxy 1159, 6; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 167, 25; PGM 4, 2629; Da 3:15; Bel 8; TestSol 13:3 P): εἰ δὲ μή γε (sc. προσέχετε), μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε otherwise you have no reward Mt 6:1; cp. Lk 10:6. Elliptically: κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον• εἰ δὲ μή γε, ἐκκόψεις αὐτήν who knows, it may bear fruit next year; if not, fine, then cut it down (= have it cut down) 13:9.
    β. after negat. clauses, otherwise (X., An. 7, 1, 8; Diod S 3, 47, 4; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 100; LBW 1651 μὴ ἀδικεῖν…, εἰ δὲ μή; UPZ 196 I, 33 [119 B.C.]; Job 32:22) Mk 2:21f.—After a negative statement: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς. εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται people do not pour new wine into old skins; otherwise they burst Mt 9:17; cp. Lk 5:36. μή τίς με δόξῃ ἄφρονα εἶναι• εἰ δὲ μή γε, κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέχασθέ με no one is to consider me foolish; otherwise at least accept me as a fool 2 Cor 11:16.
    ⓔ εἰ καί even if, even though, although Lk 11:8; 18:4; 1 Cor 7:21; 2 Cor 4:16; 7:8; 12:11; Phil 2:17; Col 2:5; Hb 6:9; AcPlCor 2:32.
    ⓕ εἰ μὲν γάρ for if Ac 25:11 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν); 2 Cor 11:4; Hb 8:4 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν).
    ⓖ εἰ μὲν οὖν if, then Hb 7:11. W. εἰ δέ foll. (X., Cyr. 8, 7, 22; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.) Ac 19:38.
    ⓗ εἰ μέντοι if, on the other hand Js 2:8.
    ⓘ εἰ μή (=πλήν) but 1 Cor 7:17 (= in general) (B-D-F §376).—After negatives
    α. except, if not, mostly without a verb depending on εἰ μή (X., An. 2, 1, 12; JosAs 12:11; Just., A I, 29, 1) Mt 11:27; 12:24; 16:4; J 3:13; Ro 7:7; Gal 1:19 (HKoch, Z. Jakobusfrage Gal 1:19: ZNW 33, ’34, 204–9); but also with a verb (Jos., Ant. 8, 316) Mt 5:13; Mk 6:5; Ac 21:25 v.l.
    β. but (OGI 201, 20f οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἔξω; in note 33 the ed. gives exx. fr. Aristoph. for this use) without a verb Mt 12:4; w. a verb (Theod. Prodr. 7, 426 H.) Gal 1:7, s. ἄλλος 2b. For ἐκτὸς εἰ μή s. ἐκτός 3a.
    ⓙ εἰ μήτι unless indeed, unless perhaps (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 198 D.; Jos., Ant. 4, 280; Tat. 10, 2) Lk 9:13; 2 Cor 13:5; w. ἄν (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 4) 1 Cor 7:5 (s. Dssm., NB 32, 1 [BS 204 n.]; B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169; 239; Reinhold 35; JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attic. imitatore 1911, 56; JWackernagel, Antike Anredeformen 1912, 27f).
    ⓚ εἰ οὖν if, therefore Mt 6:23; Lk 11:36; 12:26; J 13:14; 18:8; Col 3:1; Phlm 17.
    ⓛ εἴπερ if indeed, if after all, since (X., An. 1, 7, 9; Menand., Epitr. 907 S. [587 Kö.]; PHal 7, 6; UPZ 59, 29 [168 B.C.]; Jdth 6:9; TestJob 3:6; Just., Tat., Ath.) Ro 3:30 (ἐπείπερ v.l.); 8:9, 17; 2 Th 1:6.—if indeed, provided that εἴπερ ἄρα (ἄρα 1a) 1 Cor 15:15. καὶ γὰρ εἴπερ for even if (cp. Od. 1, 167; B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 8:5; on 2 Cor 5:3 s. εἴ γε καί 6b above. Doubtful IEph 6:2; s. ἤ 2aβ.
    ⓜ if perchance, if haply εἰ δέ που … τις ἔλθοι if perchance … anyone came Papias (2:4).
    ⓝ εἴ πως (the spelling εἴπως is also correct; B-D-F §12) if perhaps, if somehow
    α. w. opt. (X., An. 2, 5, 2; 4, 1, 21; POxy 939, 15) εἴ πως δύναιντο παραχειμάσαι in the hope that they could spend the winter Ac 27:12.
    β. w. fut. indic. (3 Km 21:31; 4 Km 19:4; Jer 28:8; TestJos 6:6) εἴ πως εὐοδωθήσομαι whether, perhaps, I shall succeed Ro 1:10; cp. 11:14; Phil 3:11.
    ⓞ εἴτε … εἴτε (Soph. et al.; ins since 416 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw.]; pap [Mayser II/3, 159]; LXX; JosAs 5:9; ApcrEzk [Epiph 70, 11]; Jos., Ant. 16, 33 and 37; Just., Ath. B-D-F §446; 454, 3; Rob. ind.) if … (or) if, whether … or
    α. w. a verb in pres. indic. (Herm. Wr. 12, 22 thrice) 1 Cor 12:26; 2 Cor 1:6; or pres. subj. 1 Th 5:10.
    β. w. no verb (Just., D. 86, 3 al.) Ro 12:6–8; 1 Cor 3:22; 8:5; 2 Cor 5:10 al. εἴτε only once 1 Cor 14:27. εἴτε ἄρσενα εἴτε θήλειαν (ἤτε … ἤτε pap) GJs 4:1.
    ⑦ Used w. the indef. pron.: εἴ τις, εἴ τι everyone who or whoever; everything that or whatever Mt 16:24; 18:28; Mk 4:23; 9:35; Lk 9:23; 14:26; 1 Ti 3:1, 5; 5:4, 8, 16 al. Cp. 1 Cor 12:31 v.l. (ADebrunner, ConNeot XI, ’47, 37). W. subj. εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 s. 1b, above.—DELG. M-M.
    2
    εἰ μήν, more correctly εἶ μήν (B-D-F §24; Rob. 1150) for the older ἦ μήν (Hom. et al. [s. Denniston 350f], but found also Jos., Ant. 13, 76; 17, 42), in Hellenistic-Roman times (SIG 993, 20 [III B.C.]; 736, 27 [92 B.C.]; IG IV, 840, 15 [EHermann, Gr. Forschungen I 1912, 312]; pap since 112 B.C. [Mayser 78]; LXX e.g. Ezk 33:27; 34:8 al.; Num 14:28; Jdth 1:12; Bar 2:29 [Thackeray 83]) formula used in oaths surely, certainly Hb 6:14 (Gen 22:17).—Dssm., NB 33ff (BS 205ff).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰ

  • 8 γίνομαι

    γίνομαι (in the form γίγνομαι [s. below] Hom.+; as γίν. since Aristot.+; and s. Kühner-Bl. II p. 391; Schwyzer I 215; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 126; Mayser p. 165 and lit. there). Impf. ἐγινόμην; fut. γενήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην, 3 sg. opt. γένοιτο; very rare v.l. (B-D-F §81, 3) γενάμενος (GJs 6:1; 16;1; 25:1 [s. deStrycker 249]; also found in Ps.-Callisth. 1, 20, 1; 1, 41, 11; ApcEsdr 1:3 p. 24, 7 Tdf.; Mel., P. 49, 346 [Bodm.]). Pass.: fut. ptc. τῶν γενηθησομένων (Eccl 1:11 v.l.); 1 aor. ἐγενήθην (Doric, H. Gk.; Phryn. 108 Lob.; pap fr. III B.C., Mayser I/22 ’38, 157f [w. lit.]; ins [Schweizer 181; Nachmanson 168; Thieme 13]; LXX), impv. γενηθήτω; pf. γεγένημαι (Meisterhans3-Schw.: Att. ins since 376 B.C.; Mayser 391) uncontested use in NT only J 2:9; GJs 24:3 (γεγένν-pap); apolog. On pf. γέγονα s. Meisterhans3-Schw.: since 464 B.C.; Mayser 372; on the aoristic use of γέγονα s. Mlt. 145f; 238; 239; PChantraine, Histoire du parfait grec 1927, 233–45; 3 pl. γέγοναν Ro 16:7 (v.l. γεγόνασιν) and Rv 21:6; s. KBuresch, Γέγοναν: RhM 46, 1891, 193ff; Mlt. 52 n.; ptc. γεγονώς; plpf. 3 sg. ἐγεγόνει (1 Macc. 4:27; 2 Macc. 13:17; J 6:17; Just.), without augment γεγόνει (Ac 4:22; v.l. ἐγεγόνει), s. B-D-F §78; Mlt-H. 190. On the variation γίνομαι and γίγνομαι s. W-S. §5, 31; B-D-F §34, 4; Mlt-H. 108. A verb with numerous nuances relating to being and manner of being. Its contrast to the more static term εἰμί can be seen in Kaibel 595, 5 οὐκ ἤμην καὶ ἐγενόμην=I was not and then I came to be (cp. Ath. 4, 2 in 3 below).
    ① to come into being through process of birth or natural production, be born, be produced (SIG 1168, 6; Epict. 2, 17, 8; Wsd 7:3; Sir 44:9; Just., A I, 13, 3; Tat. 26, 2) J 8:58; w. ἔκ τινος foll. (Diod S 3, 64, 1; Appian, Basil. 5 §1; Parthenius 1, 4; Athen. 13, 37 p. 576c ἐξ ἑταίρας; PPetr III, 2, 20; PFlor 382, 38 ὁ ἐξ ἐμοῦ γενόμενος υἱός; 1 Esdr 4:16; Tob 8:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 216) Ro 1:3; Gal 4:4 (cp. 1QS 11:21). Also of plants 1 Cor 15:37. Of fruits ἔκ τινος be produced by a tree Mt 21:19 (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 13 ὁ ἐκ τ. χώρας γιγνόμενος σῖτος). W. ἀπό τινος foll. Ox 1081 (SJCh), 11 γε̣[ινόμε]νον, 14 γέγ[ονος], 14f γε[ι]νομεν[ον], 19 γέγονος.
    ② to come into existence, be made, be created, be manufactured, be performed
    ⓐ gener. ὸ̔ γέγονεν J 1:3c (s. ref. to Vawter, below); w. διά τινος vs. 3a (MTeschendorf, D. Schöpfungsged. im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 337–72). W. χωρίς τινος vs. 3b (IAndrosIsis, Cyrene 15 [103 A.D.] Ἐμοῦ δὲ χωρὶς γείνετʼ οὐδὲν πώποτε; Cleanthes, Hymn to Zeus 15 [Stoic. I 537=Coll. Alex. no. 1 p. 227] οὐδέ τι γίγνεται ἔργον σοῦ δίχα; note the related style 1QH 1:20; on the syntax of J 1:3f see BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6, who favors a full stop after οὐδὲ ἕν, s. εἷς 2b and lit. cited there on J 1:3). W. ἔκ τινος Hb 11:3. Of cult images διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι made w. hands Ac 19:26 (cp. PRyl 231, 3 [40 A.D.] τοὺς ἄρτους γενέσθαι). Of miracles: be done, take place (Tob 11:15; Wsd 19:13 v.l. Swete) Mt 11:20f, 23; Lk 10:13; Ac 8:13. ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο on whom this miracle had been performed 4:22. W. mention of the author διά τινος (cp. 4 Macc 17:11) 2:43; 4:16, 30; 12:9; 24:2. διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Mk 6:2; Ac 14:3. ὑπό τινος (Herodian 8, 4, 2; OGI 168, 46 [115 B.C.] τὰ γεγονότα ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς φιλάνθρωπα; UPZ III, 3, 7 [116 B.C.]; PTebt 786, 14 [II B.C.]; Wsd 9:2; Jos., Ant. 8, 111; 347; Just., D. 35, 8 τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ [Jesus] καὶ νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων) Lk 9:7 v.l.; 13:17; 23:8; Eph 5:12. Of commands, instructions be fulfilled, performed γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου thy will be done (Appian, Liby. 90 §423 τὸ πρόσταγμα δεῖ γενέσθαι; Syntipas p. 25, 3 γενέσθω τὸ αἴτημα) Mt 6:10; 26:42; Lk 11:2; cp. 22:42. γέγονεν ὸ̔ ἐπέταξας your order has been carried out 14:22. γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν that their demand should be granted 23:24. Of institutions: be established, the Sabbath for the sake of humans Mk 2:27 (Crates, Ep. 24 οὐ γεγόνασιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τ. ἵππων χάριν, ἀλλʼ οἱ ἵπποι τ. ἀνθρώπων).
    ⓑ w. mention of the special nature of an undertaking: ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί in order to have such action taken in my case 1 Cor 9:15. ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ τί γένηται; what will be done when it (the wood) is dry? Lk 23:31.
    ③ come into being as an event or phenomenon from a point of origin, arise, come about, develop (Alcaeus 23 Diehl2 [320 L-P.] καί κʼ οὐδὲν ἐκ δένος γένοιτο=nothing could originate from nothing; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὸ̓ν)
    ⓐ of events or phenomena in nature (Sir 40:10; Ex 10:22; Job 40:23; Jos., Ant. 9, 36): lightning, thunder (X., An. 3, 1, 11) J 12:29; Rv 8:5; 11:19; calm (on the sea) Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; Lk 8:24; storm Mk 4:37; a cloud (cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 36) 9:7; Lk 9:34; Hv 4, 3, 7; flood Lk 6:48; earthquake (Parian Marbles [III B.C.]=FGrH: 239B, 24) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Ac 16:26; Rv 6:12; 11:13; 16:18; darkness Mt 27:45; Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44; J 6:17; hail, fire Rv 8:7. Of a dawning day ὅτε δὲ ἡμέρα ἐγένετο (cp. περὶ ἀρχομένην ἡμέραν ‘about dawn’ Jos., Vi 15: in a related story of shipwreck) Ac 27:39.
    ⓑ of other occurrences (Arrian, Anab. 4, 4, 3 τὰ ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο=the sacrifice did not turn out [favorably]; 1 Macc 1:25; 4:58; 9:27; 13:44; Jdth 7:29; 14:19 al.): complaining Ac 6:1; persecution, oppression Mt 13:21; 24:21; Mk 4:17; 13:19; Ac 11:19; discussion J 3:25; Ac 15:7; tumult Mt 26:5; 27:24; GJs 21:1 and 25:1; a sound Ac 2:2, 6; weeping 20:37; clamor 23:9; Mt 25:6; AcPl Ha 4, 6; famine Lk 4:25; 15:14; Ac 11:28; ὁρμή (q.v.) 14:5; war Rv 12:7; sharp contention Ac 15:39; tear (in a garment) Mt 9:16; Mk 2:21; Lk 6:49; silence (s. σιγή) Ac 21:40; Rv 8:1; στάσις (q.v. 2) Lk 23:19; Ac 15:2; 23:7, 10; concourse 21:30; confusion 19:23; shout, loud voice 2:6; 19:34; Rv 11:15; dispute Lk 22:24; envy, strife 1 Ti 6:4; astonishment AcPl Ha 4, 25; joy 6, 3; prayer 6, 7; offering 6, 37.
    ⓒ of the various divisions of a day (Jdth 13:1; 1 Macc 5:30; 4 Macc 3:8 al.) γενομένης ἡμέρας when day came (Jos., Ant. 10, 202, Vi. 405) Lk 4:42; Ac 12:18; 16:35; 23:12; cp. Lk 6:13; 22:66; Ac 27:29, 33, 39. Difft. Mk 6:21 γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου when a convenient/opportune day arrived. ὀψέ (cp. Gen 29:25; 1 Km 25:37) 11:19. ὀψίας γενομένης Mt 8:16; 14:15, 23; 16:2; 26:20; 27:57; Mk 1:32; 6:47; 14:17; 15:42; cp. J 6:16. πρωί̈ας Mt 27:1; J 21:4. νύξ Ac 27:27. ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης when it had grown late Mk 6:35; cp. 15:33; Lk 22:14; Ac 26:4.
    ④ to occur as process or result, happen, turn out, take place (Dicaearch., Fgm. 102 W.: a campaign ‘takes place’; Diod S 32 Fgm. 9c τὰς εἰς τ. πατέρα γεγενημένας ἁμαρτίας=the misdeeds ‘perpetrated’ against his father; 2 Macc 1:32; 13:17; 3 Macc 1:11; 4:12; 5:17 al.)
    ⓐ gener. τοῦτο ὅλον γέγονεν all this took place w. ἵνα foll. Mt 1:22; 26:56. ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται until all has taken place (=is past) 5:18. πάντα τὰ γενόμενα everything that had happened (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 121 §508 τὰ γενόμενα; 1 Esdr 1:10; Jdth 15:1; 1 Macc 4:20; 2 Macc 10:21; 3 Macc 1:17) 18:31; cp. 21:21; 24:6, 20, 34; 26:54; 27:54; 28:11; Mk 5:14. ἴδωμεν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός let us see this thing that has taken place Lk 2:15 (TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 15 [Stone p. 40]) θανάτου γενομένου since a death has occurred, i.e. since he has died Hb 9:15. τούτου γενομένου after this had happened (Jos., Ant. 9, 56; 129) Ac 28:9. τὸ γεγονός what had happened (Diod S 12, 49, 4; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 18 §496; Jos., Ant. 14, 292) Lk 8:34; 24:12. τὰ γεγονότα AcPl Ha 11, 1.—μὴ γένοιτο strong negation, in Paul only after rhet. questions (cp. TestJob 38:1; JosAs 25:8; Epict., index p. 540e; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 1, 2, Dial. Meretr. 13, 4; Achilles Tat. 5, 18, 4; Aristaen., Ep. 1, 27) by no means, far from it, God forbid (Goodsp., Probs., 88; AMalherbe, HTR 73, ’80, 231–41) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 6, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21. In more extensive phrasing (the LXX has exx. only of this usage: Gen 44:17; 3 Km 20:3 al.; cp. Josh 22:29; Demosth. 10, 27; Alciphron 2, 5, 3 al.; Ael. Aristid. 23, 80 K.=42 p. 795 D.; 30 p. 578 D.; 54 p. 679 ὸ̔ μὴ γένοιτο) Gal 6:14; w. ἵνα foll. AcPl Ha 7, 40. τί γέγονεν ὅτι (cp. Eccl 7:10) why is it that J 14:22.—Of festivals: be held, take place, come (X., Hell. 7, 4, 28 τὰ Ὀλύμπια; 4, 5, 1; 4 Km 23:22f; 2 Macc 6:7) feast of dedication J 10:22; passover Mt 26:2; sabbath Mk 6:2; wedding J 2:1.—Abs. impv. (put twice for emphasis as Lucian, Pisc. 1 βάλλε, βάλλε; Philostrat., Ep. 35, 1 λάβε λάβε; Procop. Soph., Ep. 45) γενηθήτω γενηθήτω so let it be as a closing formula 1 Cor 16:24 v.l. (cp. Herodas 4, 85, where the sacristan closes his prayer to Asclepius with the words: ὧδε ταῦτʼ εἴη=so may it be).—On γένοιτο ἀμήν GJs 6:2 s. ἀμήν 1a.
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. affected
    α. w. inf. foll. (UPZ 24, 29 al.; 1 Macc 13:5; Jos., Ant. 6, 232) ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι so that he would not have to lose time Ac 20:16.
    β. w. adv. or adv. phrase added (1 Esdr 6:33) κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν according to your faith let it be done to you, i.e. you believe, and you won’t be disappointed Mt 9:29; cp. 8:13. γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου may that happen to me as you have said Lk 1:38. πῶς ἐγένετο τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ what had happened to the possessed man Mk 5:16. ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται that it may be well w. you Eph 6:3 (Dt 5:16; cp. Epict. 2, 5, 29 εὖ σοι γένοιτο; Aelian, VH 9, 36). γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις let it be done for you as you desire, i.e. your wish is granted Mt 15:28.
    γ. w. nom. of thing (1 Macc 4:25; Sir 51:17; Ar. 15:5) γίνεταί τινί τι someth. happens to or befalls a person Mk 9:21. ἵνα μὴ χεῖρόν σοί τι γένηται lest someth. worse come upon you J 5:14. τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ what has happened to him Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1, 23; AcPl Ha 5, 20). τὸ γεγενημένον αὐτῷ Ac 3:10 D. ἐγίνετο πάσῃ ψυχῄ φόβος fear came upon everyone (cp. Tob 11:18) 2:43. λύπη AcPl Ha 6, 16. Freq. γέγονε ἐμοί τι someth. has come to me= I have someth.: πώρωσις τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν a hardening (of heart) has befallen Israel Ro 11:25; σωτηρία τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γεγένηται GJs 19:2; cp. Lk 19:9; διὰ τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν γενομένην Παύλῳ AcPl Ha 3, 15; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ ἑκατὸν πρόβατα if a man has a hundred sheep Mt 18:12. τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται those outside receive everything in parables Mk 4:11. μήποτε γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι that you may receive no repayment Lk 14:12; cp. 19:9; J 15:7; 1 Cor 4:5.
    ⓒ w. gen. of pers. (Diod S 16, 64, 2 τὸν τῆς Ἑλένης γεγενημένον ὅρμον=the necklace that had belonged to Helen): ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κόσμου τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν the kingdom of the world has come into the possession of our Lord Rv 11:15.
    ⓓ γίνεταί τι ἐπί τινι someth. happens in the case of or to a person Mk 5:33 v.l.; ἐν v.l. This can also be expressed w. εἴς τινα Ac 28:6 or the double nom. τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο what had become of Peter 12:18 (cp. Jos., Vi. 296 οἱ εἴκοσι χρυσοῖ τὶ γεγόνασιν).
    ⓔ w. inf. foll., to emphasize the actual occurrence of the action denoted by the verb: ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό if it comes about that he finds it= if he actually finds it Mt 18:13 (s. PCatt V, 19f [=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 372 V] ἐὰν γένηταί με ἀποδημεῖν; PAmh 135, 10; BGU 970, 5). ἐγένετο αὐτὸν παραπορεύεσθαι he happened to be passing Mk 2:23; cp. Lk 6:1, 6. ἐγένετο ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν just then the heaven opened Lk 3:21; cp. 16:22 (ἐν τῷ ἀποθανεῖν P75); Ac 4:5; 9:3, 32, 37, 43; 11:26; 14:1; 16:16; 19:1; 21:1, 5; 22:6, 17; 27:44; 28:8 (UPZ 62, 29 [161 B.C.] γίνεται γὰρ ἐντραπῆναι).
    ⓕ καὶ ἐγένετο (ἐγένετο δέ) periphrastic like וַיְהִי with וַ foll. to indicate the progress of the narrative; it is followed either by a conjunction like ὅτε, ὡς etc., or a gen. abs., or a prepositional constr., and joined to it is a finite verb w. καί (Jdth 5:22; 10:1; Sus 19 Theod.; 1 Macc 1:1; 5:1; Gen 39:7, 13, 19; 42:35; JosAs 11:1; 22:1; AscIs 3:2) Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15 v.l.; Lk 2:15; 5:1, 12, 17; 8:1, 22; 14:1.—Without the second καί (Jdth 2:4; 12:10; 13:12; 1 Macc 6:8; 7:2 v.l.; 9:23; Sus 28 Theod.; Bel 18 Theod.; TestAbr B 1 p. 105, 1 [Stone p. 58] and 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; TestJob 31:1; JosAs 1:1; 3:1) Mt 7:28; 11:1; 13:53; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 1:9; 4:4; Lk 1:8, 23, 41, 59; 2:1, 6, 46; 6:12 al. At times it is followed by an inf. The phrase is usually omitted in translation; older versions transl. it came to pass.—Mlt. 16f; MJohannessohn, Das bibl. καὶ ἐγένετο u. s. Geschichte: ZVS 53, 1926, 161–212 (LXX); s. MDibelius, Gnomon 3, 1927, 446–50; HPernot, Études sur la langue des Évangiles 1927, 189–99; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 29–62; JReiling, BT 16, ’65, 153–63; EDelebecque, Études grecques sur l’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65.
    ⑤ to experience a change in nature and so indicate entry into a new condition, become someth.
    ⓐ w. nouns (Lamellae Aur. Orphicae ed. AOlivieri 1915, p. 16, 5 θεὸς ἐγένου ἐξ ἀνθρώπου [IV/III]; Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 5; Sir 51:2; 1 Esdr 4:26; Wsd 8:2; 4 Macc 16:6; En 103:11; Tat. 19, 2 τοῦ θανάτου καταφρονηταὶ γίνεσθε): ὅπως γένησθε υἱοὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν that you may become sons of your father Mt 5:45; ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων I will turn you into fishers of people Mk 1:17; a traitor Lk 6:16; friends 23:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 121); children of God J 1:12; children of light 12:36; a Christian Ac 26:29; apostle AcPlCor 2:4; a father Ro 4:18; a fool 1 Cor 3:18; a spectacle 4:9; a man, an adult 13:11 (Tob 1:9); a curse Gal 3:13. οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα he did not exalt himself to be made high priest Hb 5:5; ἐγένετο ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ Σαμουήλ Samuel became (high priest) in his place GJs 10:2. W. double nom. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 3, 15 δράκων λίθος ἐγένετο; Quint. Smyrn. 12, 507; Bel 28; 4 Macc 18:7) οἱ λίθοι ἄρτοι γίνονται the stones turn into loaves Mt 4:3. τὸ αἵμα αὐτοῦ λίθον γεγενημένον GJs 24:3. ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (the reverse PBerl 13044, col. III, 28ff [UWilcken, SBBerlAk 1923, 161f] τί ποιῶν ἄν τις γένοιτο θεός;). τὸ ὕδωρ γενήσεται πηγή 4:14. ἡ περιτομὴ ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν Ro 2:25. ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ διάκονος I became a courier Col 1:23 (cp. Herodian 2, 6, 8 ἀνὴρ ἔπαρχος γενόμενος).—Also γ. εἴς τι (Menand., Peric. 49f Kö. [169f S.] τὸ κακὸν εἰς ἀγαθὸν ῥέπει γινόμενον; 1 Km 4:9; Jdth 5:18; 1 Macc 2:11, 43; 3:58; En 19:2 al.; B-D-F §145, 1): ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον it became a tree Lk 13:19; εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; Ac 4:11; 1 Pt 2:7 (all in ref. to Ps 117:22); εἰς χαρὰν γ. change (or, turn) into joy J 16:20. εἰς οὐδέν come to nothing Ac 5:36. εἰς παγίδα Ro 11:9 (Ps 68:23); εἰς κενὸν γ. be done in vain 1 Th 3:5. εἰς ἄψινθον Rv 8:11. Cp. AcPl Ha 6, 6. Also w. γίνεσθαι omitted: εἰς κατάκριμα (sc. ἐγένετο τὸ κρίμα) Ro 5:18.
    ⓑ used w. an adj. to paraphrase the passive (Jdth 11:11; 1 Esdr 7:3; 2 Macc 3:34; Sus 64 Theod.; En 103:9; Ath. 37, 1 πάντων ὑποχειρίων γιγνομένων): ἁπαλὸν γ. become tender Mt 24:32; Mk 13:28; ἀπειθῆ γ. Ac 26:19; ἀποσυνάγωγον γ. be expelled fr. the synagogue J 12:42; ἄφαντον γ. disappear Lk 24:31; σκωληκόβρωτον γ. be eaten by worms Ac 12:23; γνωστόν, φανερὸν γ. become known (Just., A I, 63, 6) Mk 6:14; Ac 1:19; 9:42; 19:17; 1 Cor 3:13; 14:25; Phil 1:13; δόκιμον γ. pass the test Js 1:12; ἑδραῖον γ. 1 Cor 15:58; ἔκδηλον γ. 2 Ti 3:9; AcPlCor 1:16; ἔξυπνον γ. Ac 16:27 (1 Esdr 3:3=Jos., Ant. 11:34); s. ἀπόπληκτος, ἐλεύθερος, ἐμφανής, ἔμφοβος, ἐνεργής, ἔντρομος, καθαρός, μέγας, περιδάκρυτος, περικρατής, πλήρης, πρηνής, τυφλός, ὑγιής, ὑπήκοος, ὑπόδικος, φανερός 1.
    ⓒ w. ἐν of a state of being (Stoic. III 221, 16; Diod S 20, 62, 4 ἐν ἀνέσει γ.; Plut., Tit. Flam. 378 [16, 1] ἐν ὀργῇ γ.; Lucian, Tim. 28; PPetr II, 20; III, 12 [252 B.C.] ἐν ἐπισχέσει γ.; BGU 5 II, 19 ἐν νόσῳ; POxy 471 IV, 77f; 4 Km 9:20; 1 Macc 1:27 v.l.; Sus 8 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 320, Ant. 16, 372; Mel., P. 18 ἐν πόνοις … ἐν πληγαῖς etc.) ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ Lk 22:44. ἐν ἐκστάσει Ac 22:17. ἐν πνεύματι under the Spirit’s influence Rv 1:10; 4:2; AcPl Ha 6, 28. ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων be like human beings Phil 2:7. ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, φόβῳ, τρόμῳ 1 Cor 2:3. ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:7. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γ. come to one’s senses (Soph., Phil. 950; X., An. 1, 5, 17; Polyb. 1, 49, 8; Chariton 3, 9, 11) Ac 12:11; γ. ἐν Χριστῷ be a Christian Ro 16:7. Cp. 7 below.
    ⑥ to make a change of location in space, move
    ⓐ εἴς τι (Hdt. 5, 87 al.; Philo, Op. M. 86; 2 Macc 1:13; also ἐν: Just., A II, 9, 3 ἐγενόμεθα ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ τόπω): εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα γ. (Jos., Ant. 10, 42) Ac 20:16; 21:17; 25:15. εἰς τὸν ἀγρόν Hv 3, 1, 4. Of a voice: ἐγένετο εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου reached my ear Lk 1:44. Fig. (cp. Bar 4:28) of Abraham’s blessing εἰς τὰ ἔθνη come to the Gentiles Gal 3:14; cp. 2 Cor 8:14 (s. περίσσευμα 1, ὑστέρημα 1).
    ⓑ ἔκ τινος (Job 28:2): γ. ἐκ μέσου be removed, Lat. e medio tolli (cp. Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 6 ἐκ μέσου γενομένων ἐκείνων; Plut., Timol. 238 [5, 3]; Achilles Tat. 2, 27, 2) 2 Th 2:7 (HFulford, ET 23, 1912, 40f: ‘leave the scene’). Of a voice fr. heaven: ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν γ. sound forth fr. heaven (2 Macc 2:21; cp. Da 4:31 Theod.) Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; 9:35; cp. vs. 36.
    ⓒ ἐπί τι: ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον go to the tomb Lk 24:22; ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς when he was at the steps Ac 21:35. Of fear that befalls someone (2 Macc 12:22) Lk 1:65; 4:36; Ac 5:5. Of ulcers: break out on someone Rv 16:2 (Ex 9:10f). Of divine commands: go out to someone Lk 3:2. ἐπί is somet. used w. the gen. (Appian, Liby. 93 §440; Alex. Aphr., Mixt. II 2 p. 213, 21) instead of the acc.: γενόμενος ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου when he had arrived at the place 22:40 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 327, 18 ἐπὶ τ. τόπων γινόμενος).—J 6:21.
    ⓓ w. κατά and gen. of place: τὸ γενόμενον ῥῆμα καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας the message that has spread throughout all Judea Ac 10:37. W. acc. of place (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 15; Apollon. Paradox. 3 κατὰ τόπους γ.; Jos., Ant. I, 174; cp. 2 Macc 9:8): γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τόπον Lk 10:32; γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον Ac 27:7.
    ⓔ w. πρός and acc. of the direction and goal (PLond III, 962, 1 p. 210 [III A.D.] γενοῦ πρὸς Ἄταϊν τὸν ποιμένα; PFlor 180, 45) 1 Cor 2:3; 2J 12. Of divine instructions be given to someone (Gen 15:1, 4; Jer 1:2, 11; 13:8; Ezk 6:1; Hos 1:1; cp. ἐπί w. acc.) J 10:35; Ac 7:31 v.l.; 10:13; 13:32.
    ⓕ w. σύν and the dat. join someone (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 8; 2 Macc 13:13) Lk 2:13.
    ⓖ w. ἐγγύς (X., An. 1, 8, 8, Cyr. 7, 1, 7; cp. γίν. πλησίον Philo, Mos. 1, 228; Jos., Ant. 4, 40): ἐγγὺς τοῦ πλοίου γίνεσθαι come close to the boat J 6:19. Fig. of the relation of believers to Christ: come near Eph 2:13.
    ⓗ w. ὧδε come here J 6:25;
    ⓘ ἔμπροσθέν τινος γ. J 1:15, 30 s. on ἔμπροσθεν 1bζ and ὀπίσω 2b.
    ⑦ to come into a certain state or possess certain characteristics, to be, prove to be, turn out to be (on relation to the forms of εἰμί [here and in 8–10] s. ALink, StKr 69, 1896, 420ff). Used w. the nom. (Wsd 16:3; Jdth 16:21; Sir 31:22; 1 Macc 3:58) γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι be prudent Mt 10:16. ἄκαρπος γίνεται 13:22; Mk 4:19.—W. other words: vs. 22; 9:50; Lk 1:2; 2:2; 6:36 and very oft. Freq. the dat. of advantage (dat. commodi) is added (1 Macc 10:47; 2 Macc 7:37; 4 Macc 6:28; 12:17): ἀγαπητόν τινι γ. be dear to someone 1 Th 2:8. ἀπρόσκοπον γ. τινι be inoffensive to someone 1 Cor 10:32; γ. τινι μαθητήν J 15:8; μισθαποδότην γ. τινι be a rewarder of someone Hb 11:6; γ. ὁδηγόν τινι Ac 1:16. Cp. παρηγορία, σημεῖον, τύπος.—γ. ὁμοθυμαδόν come together in unanimity or reach unanimity Ac 15:25.—τὶ γίνεταί τινί τι a thing results in someth. for someone τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγ. θάνατος; Ro 7:13. ἡ ἐξουσία πρόσκομμα τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 Cor 8:9.—γίνομαι ὡς, ὥσπερ, ὡσεί τις (Ps 21:15; 31:9; 37:15; 82:11; 87:5 al.) be, become, show oneself like Mt 6:16; 10:25; 18:3; 28:4; Lk 22:26, 44; 1 Cor 4:13; 9:20f; Gal 4:12. καθὼς ἐγένετο … οὕτως ἔσται as it was … so it will be Lk 17:26, 28. οὐ χρὴ ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι this should not be so Js 3:10. ὁσίως καὶ δικαίως καὶ ἀμέμπτως ὑμῖν ἐγενήθημεν we proved/showed ourselves … toward you 1 Th 2:10.—In statements pert. to age (Aristoxenus, Fgm. 16 γεγονότα [sc. τὸν Πυθαγόραν] ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα; Demetr. of Phaleron [IV–III B.C.], Fgm. 153 Wehrli [’49]; Demetr: 722 Fgm. 1, 1 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 10, 50) ἐτῶν δώδεκα Lk 2:42; cp. 1 Ti 5:9.—Here prob. also belongs ἐγένετο γνώμης he decided Ac 20:3 (cp. Plut., Phoc. 752 [23, 4] ἐλπίδος μεγάλης γ.; Cass. Dio 61, 14 τ. ἐπιθυμίας γ.; Jos., Bell. 6, 287).
    ⑧ to be present at a given time, be there ([Ps.-]Jos., Ant. 18, 63) Mk 1:4; J 1:6, hence exist (Diod S 3, 52, 4 γέγονε γένη γυναικῶν=there have been nations of women; Appian, Maced. 18 §3 τὸ χρυσίον τὸ γιγνόμενον=the gold that was at hand; Bar 3:26; 2 Macc 10:24) Ro 11:5; 1J 2:18. ἐγένετο there lived Lk 1:5. ἔν τινι 2 Pt 2:1. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Rv 16:18 (Da 12:1 Theod.).
    ⑨ to be closely related to someone or someth., belong to
    ⓐ gen. of the possessor (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 79 §336 a slave γεγένητο Πομπηίου=had belonged to Pompey: B-D-F §162, 7) belong to someone Lk 20:14, 33 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 83 §350 γυνὴ Κράσσου γεγενημένη=who had been the wife of [the younger] Crassus).
    ⓑ w. dat. of pers. belong to someone (PPetr II, 40b, 7 [277 B.C.]; O. Wilck II, 1530, 2f [120 B.C.] τὸ γινόμενόν μοι=what belongs to me) of a woman ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ Ro 7:3f (cp. Ruth 1:12f; Dt 24:2).
    ⓒ w. prep. μετά τινος (Josh 2:19) Ac 9:19; 20:18. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his intimate friends Mk 16:10. πρός τινα be w. someone 1 Cor 16:10 ( make him [Timothy] feel quite at home with you Mft.) ὑπό τινα be under the authority of someone or someth. (1 Macc 10:38) Gal 4:4.
    ⓓ Here perh. belongs ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται it is not a matter of private interpretation 2 Pt 1:20.
    ⑩ to be in or at a place, be in, be there
    ⓐ ἔν τινι to designate one’s present or future place of residence (X., An. 4, 3, 29; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 4 §15 Ἀντώνιος ἐν Ἐφέσῳ γενόμενος; Aelian, VH 4, 15; Herodian 2, 2, 5; POxy 283, 11; 709, 6 ἐν Μένφει γενόμενος; PTebt 416, 3; BGU 731 II, 6 ἐν οἰκίᾳ μου; Num 11:35; Judg 17:4; 1 Ch 14:17; Jdth 5:7 al. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.) Mt 26:6; Mk 9:33; Ac 7:38; 13:5; 2 Ti 1:17; Rv 1:9; AcPl Ha 7, 23.
    ⓑ w. adv.: ἐκεῖ (X., An. 6, 5, 20; 3 Km 8:8 v.l.; Jos., Ant. 10, 180) Ac 19:21. κατὰ μόνας Mk 4:10.—B. 637. DELG s.v. γίγνομαι. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γίνομαι

  • 9 οὖν

    οὖν (Hom.+) a particle, never found at the beginning of a sentence. In our lit. it is an inferential and then mainly a transitional conjunction (so Hdt.+ [Kühner-G. II p. 326].—B-D-F §451, 1; Rob. 1191f; Mlt-Turner 337f).
    ① inferential, denoting that what it introduces is the result of or an inference fr. what precedes, so, therefore, consequently, accordingly, then.
    ⓐ in declarative sentences (PTebt 37, 15 [73 B.C.] ἐγὼ οὖν … γέγραφα=‘consequently I … am writing’; difft. 4 below) Mt 1:17; 3:10 (s. also 3 below); 7:24; Lk 3:9; 11:35; J 6:13; Ac 1:21; 5:41; Ro 5:1; 6:4; 11:5; 13:10; 16:19; 1 Cor 4:16; 7:26; 2 Cor 3:12; Eph 4:1, 17; Phil 2:28; 1 Pt 2:7; 3J 8 al.; AcPlCor 2:10, 19.—ἀπόδοτε οὖν well, then, give back Mt 22:21 (here οὖν=mod. Gk. λοιπόν).
    ⓑ in commands and invitations, with intensive force (PTebt 33, 2 [φρόν]τισον οὖν ἵνα γένη(ται) ἀκολύθως=‘take care, then, that its (the letter’s) stipulations are followed’. Here οὖν picks up on the suggestion of the letter’s importance because of the prestige of the addressee; difft. 3 below) ποιήσατε οὖν καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας Mt 3:8 (also s. 3 below); ἔσεσθε οὖν ὑμεῖς τέλειοι 5:48. μὴ οὖν φοβεῖσθε 10:31 (cp. ApcEsdr 7:2; Just., D. 9, 2). προσερχώμεθα οὖν μετὰ παρρησίας Hb 4:16. Cp. Mt 6:8, 9, 31; 9:38; Mk 10:9; 13:35; Lk 8:18; 10:2, 40; Ac 2:36; 3:19; 8:22; 23:15, 21 (also s. 4 below); Ro 6:12 (WNauck, Das οὖν-paräneticum: ZNW 49, ’58, 134f); 1 Cor 10:31; 2 Cor 7:1; Gal 5:1; Phil 2:29; Col 2:16 al. νῦν οὖν πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ Ac 16:36.
    ⓒ in questions
    α. in real questions θέλεις οὖν; do you want, then? Mt 13:28. σὺ οὖν εἶ; are you, then? Lk 22:70. Cp. J 18:39. νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν; μὴ γένοιτο Ro 3:31; cp. Gal 3:21.—1 Cor 6:15. τί οὖν; why then? (Menand., Her. 40, Epitr. 313 S. [137 Kö.]; Dio Chrys. 2, 9; Just., D. 3, 2) Mt 17:10; cp. 19:7; J 1:25; what then? (Menand., Epitr. 226 S. [50 Kö], Peric. 744 [321 Kö.]; TestJob 38:7; Just., D. 3, 6; 67, 10) Mt 27:22; Mk 15:12; Lk 3:10; 20:15, 17; J 6:30b. τίς οὖν; (Menand., Epitr. 221 S. [45 Kö.]; TestJob 38:3; Just., D. 7, 1; Ath. 35, 1) Lk 7:42. διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε; Mt 21:25; Mk 11:31 (TestJob 38:1; Just., D. 47, 2). πῶς οὖν; (Menand., Epitr. 441 S. [265 Kö.]; TestJob 19:2; Ar. 9, 9; 10, 7 al.) Mt 22:43; J 9:19; Ro 4:10; Ox 1081, 25=Otero p. 83 (SJCh 90, 2); AcPl Ha 10, 9. πότε οὖν; Lk 21:7. πόθεν οὖν; Mt 13:27, 56; J 4:11. ποῦ οὖν; (TestJob 32:2ff) Ro 3:27; Gal 4:15.
    β. Certain formulas are favorite expressions, esp. in Paul: τί οὖν; what, then, are we to conclude? (Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 55; 60; 17 [34], 28; Jos., Bell. 2, 364) J 1:21; Ro 3:9; 6:15; 11:7. τί οὖν ἐστιν; what, then, is to be done? Ac 21:22; 1 Cor 14:15, 26. τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς; what is Apollos, really? 3:5 (s. 3 below). τί οὖν φημι; 1 Cor 10:19. τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν; what, then, are we to say? Ro 6:1; 7:7; 9:14, 30. τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα; 8:31. τί οὖν ὁ νόμος; Gal 3:19.
    γ. in rhetorical questions πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου how much more, then, is a human being worth than a sheep? Mt 12:12. πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ; how then will (Beelzebul’s) kingdom endure? vs. 26.—26:54; Lk 7:31; Ro 10:14 (s. also 4 below).
    ② marker of continuation of a narrative, so, now, then (s. Rob. 1191: ‘a transitional particle relating clauses or sentences loosely together by way of confirmation’)
    ⓐ οὖν serves to resume a subject once more after an interruption: so, as has been said ἔλεγεν οὖν τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις Lk 3:7 (connecting w. vs. 3). Cp. 19:12; J 4:6, 9, 28; Ac 8:25; 12:5; cp. 25:4 (s. 4 below).—Cp. 1 Cor 8:4 (reaching back to vs. 1); 11:20.
    ⓑ οὖν serves to indicate a transition to someth. new. So esp. in the Gospel of John (Rob. 1191: ‘John boldly uses οὖν alone and needs no apology for doing so. It just carries along the narrative with no necessary thought of cause or result’.) now, then, well J 1:22; 2:18, 20; 3:25; 4:33, 46, 48; 5:10, 19; 6:60, 67; 7:25, 28, 33, 35, 40; 8:13, 21, 22, 25 (καὶ ἔλεγον P66), 31, 57; 9:7f, 10, 16; 20:30 (s. also 3 below); and oft.; Ac 25:1; 26:9 (also s. 3 below) al. Prob. also J 9:18 οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαίοι Well, the Judeans refused to believe (s. 4 below). Cp. 1 Cor 3:5 (s. also 3 below).
    ⓒ οὖν serves to indicate a response (HDana and JMantey, Manual Grammar of the Gk. NT 1927, p. 254) where the transl. in reply, in turn (Ex 8:6) is prob. J 4:9, 48; 6:53 al. In Ac 28:5 (s. also 4 below) Paul’s action is a response in narrative terms to the perception of the islanders: ὁ μὲν οὖν ἀποτινάξας τὸ θήριον he, in turn, shook off the creature.
    ⓓ Frequently used w. other particles in continuation of discourse or narrative: ἄρα οὖν s. ἄρα 2b. ἐὰν οὖν Mt 5:19, 23; 24:26; J 6:62; 2 Ti 2:21; Js 4:4; Rv 3:3b; 2 Cl 3:3. ἐάν τε οὖν Ro 14:8. εἰ οὖν s. εἰ 6k. εἰ μὲν οὖν s. εἰ 6g. εἴτε οὖν … εἴτε 1 Cor 10:31; 15:11. ἐπεὶ οὖν s. ἐπεί 2. μὲν οὖν … δέ (Jos., Ant. 13, 76f; Just., D. 43, 7) Mk 16:19f; Lk 3:18f; J 19:24f; Ac 8:4f; 11:19f; 1 Cor 9:25.—Also without δέ denoting contrast (TestJob 40:14; Jos., Ant. 19, 337; Just., A I, 8, 3; Tat. 15, 1) Ac 1:6, 18; 2:41; 5:41; 8:25 al. νῦν οὖν (TestJob 23:7; ApcMos 11:30) Ac 10:33b; 23:15; also 15:10 (s. νῦν 2a).—ὅταν οὖν (Just., D. 138, 2; Ath. 7, 1; 13, 1; 32, 1 al.) Mt 6:2; 21:40; 24:15. ὅτε οὖν J 2:22; 4:45; 6:24; 13:12, 31; 19:6, 8, 30; 21:15. τότε οὖν (ApcEsdr 3:14; Just., D. 56, 19) 11:14; 19:1, 16; 20:8. ὡς οὖν (Jos., Ant. 6, 145, Vi. 292; Just., D. 43, 1; 49, 7) 4:1, 40; 11:6; 18:6; 20:11; 21:9; AcPlCor 1:6. ὥσπερ οὖν Mt 13:40.—οὐκ οὖν s. οὐκοῦν.
    ③ It has been proposed that some traces of older Gk. usage in which οὖν is emphatic, = certainly, really, to be sure etc. (s. L-S-J-M s.v. 1) remain in the pap (e.g. PLond I, 28, 4, p. 43 [c. 162 B.C.]; PTebt 33, 2 [on this s. 1b above]) and in the NT (so M-M., s.v. 3 and Dana and Mantey, op. cit. p. 255f) Mt 3:8 (s. also 1b above), 10; J 20:30 (s. also 2b above); indeed, of course Ac 26:9 (s. also 2b above); 1 Cor 3:5 (s. also 1cβ above) al. On the other hand, as indicated by the cross references, there is little semantic justification for making a separate classification. (On this s. esp. Rob. 1191–92.)
    ④ It has also been proposed that οὖν may be used adversatively (M-M., s.v. 4: ‘slightly adversative sense’, and w. ref. to PTebt 37, 15 [73 B.C.]; cp. 1b above; so also Dana and Mantey, op. cit. p. 256f) in some NT pass., e.g. J 9:18 (s. 2b above); Ac 23:21; 25:4; 28:5; Ro 10:14 (s. 1cγ above) in the sense but, however—JMantey, Newly Discovered Mngs. for οὖν: Exp., 8th ser., 22, 1921, 205–14. But s. Rob. 1191–92; B-D-F §451, 1.—Denniston 415–30.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οὖν

  • 10 γάρ

    γάρ (Hom.+) conj. used to express cause, clarification, or inference. Never comes first in its clause; usu. second, but also third (Hb 11:32), or even fourth (2 Cor 1:19, as e.g. Menand., Epitr. 883 S. [=563 Kö.]; Lucian, Pisc. 10, Philops. 15; s. B-D-F §452; 475, 2; Denniston 56–114; Schwyzer II 560).
    ① marker of cause or reason, for
    ⓐ abs. Mk 1:22; 9:49; Lk 1:15; 21:4; J 2:25; Ac 2:25; Ro 1:9; 1 Cor 11:5 and oft.—It should be noted that γάρ w. a verb (and nothing else) can form a sentence (Demosth. 21, 28 δίδωσι γάρ.; Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 32 κινεῖ γάρ.; Menand., Sam. 666 S. [=321 Kö.] δεῖ γάρ.; Alexis Com. 286 Kock παύσει γάρ.; Axionicus Com. [IV B.C.] 6, 6 K.: Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 273 D.; Maximus Tyr. 10, 8g δύναται γάρ.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 3, 3; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 163d ἠνεχυρίαστο γάρ.=for it had been seized as security; Aristaen., Ep. 2, 7; Anna Comn., Alexias 5, 1 vol. I p. 156, 8 R. προπέποτο γάρ.; et al.—Ps.-Demetrius, Form. Ep. p. 12, 2 as conclusion of a letter ὀφείλω γάρ.; Vi. Aesopi G 67 P. as the ending of a story: οὐκ ἔχεις γάρ.=you don’t have any [understanding, common sense]; Polyaenus 3 the introduction ends with the words: πρόδηλον γάρ.—See also CKraeling, JBL 44, 1925, 357f; RRottley, JTS 27, 1926, 407–9; RLightfoot, Locality and Doctrine in the Gosp. ’38, 10ff; CMoule, NTS 2, ’55/56, 58f) ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ. Mk 16:8 (s. φοβέω 1a). Conclusions of this kind at the end of Mk are also found in other lit. (Horapollo 2, 80 οὗτος γάρ; Plotin. V 5, 13, 36f κρείττον γὰρ τὸ ποιοῦν τοῦ ποιούμενου• τελειότερον γάρ. [Pvan der Horst, JTS n.s. 23, ’72, 121–24]).
    ⓑ used w. other particles and conjunctions ἰδοὺ γάρ (Jdth 5:23; 9:7; 12:12; 1 Macc 9:45) Lk 1:44, 48; 2:10; 6:23; 17:21; Ac 9:11; 2 Cor 7:11 al.; s. ἰδού 1c. καὶ γάρ (B-D-F §452, 3; B-D-R §452, 3) for (=Lat. etenim, Kühner-G. II 338; s. Chariton 3, 3, 16; 2 Macc 1:19; 4 Macc 1:2; 5:8) Mk 10:45; Lk 22:37; J 4:23; Ac 19:40; 1 Cor 5:7; Hb 5:12; 12:29; Hs 9, 8, 2; for also, for even (B-D-F §452, 3; ZNW 19, 1920, 175f) Mt 8:9; Lk 6:32f; 7:8; 11:4; J 4:45; Ro 11:1; 15:3; 16:2; 2 Cor 2:10. S. FGrosheide, καὶ γάρ in het NT: TSt 33, 1915, 108–10. γὰρ καί for also, for precisely 2 Cor 2:9 (ParJer 7:6 εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ἀπεστάλην). τε γάρ for indeed (X., Mem. 1, 1, 3) Ro 1:26; 7:7; Hb 2:11 (s. τέ 2b). μὲν γάρ (3 Macc 2:15f) often followed by δέ, ἀλλά Ac 13:36; 23:8; 28:22; 2 Cor 9:1; 11:4; Hb 7:20; 12:10 (s. μέν 1aα, β); ὅτι μὲν γὰρ … ἀλλά Ac 4:16. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 1 Cor 11:9; οὐ γάρ Mt 10:20; Mk 4:22; 6:52; J 3:17; Ac 2:34; Ro 1:16; 2:11, 13, 28; 4:13; 1 Cor 1:17; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 4:30 and oft. μὴ γάρ Js 1:7 (TestAbr A 2, 79, 9 [Stone p. 6]; GrBar 6:6). οὐδὲ γάρ Lk 20:36; J 5:22; 7:5; 8:42; Ro 8:7; Gal 1:12 (s. οὐδέ 2). οὔτε γὰρ … οὔτε (Wsd 12:13; Sir 30:19) for neither … nor 1 Th 2:5.
    ⓒ γάρ is somet. repeated. It occurs twice either to introduce several arguments for the same assertion, as (Sir 37:13f; 38:1f; Wsd 7:16f) J 8:42; 1 Cor 16:7; 2 Cor 11:19f; or to have one clause confirm the other, as (Jdth 5:23; 7:27; 1 Macc 11:10) Mt 10:19f; Lk 8:29; J 5:21f, 46; Ac 2:15; Ro 6:14; 8:2f; Hv 5:3; or to have various assertions of one and the same sentence confirmed one after the other Mt 3:2f; J 3:19f (cp. Wsd 1:5f; EpJer 6; 7). γάρ also occurs three times (Wsd 9:13–15; 14:27–29) Mt 16:25–27; Lk 9:24–26; Ro 4:13–15; 2 Cor 3:9–11; four times Mk 8:35–38; Ro 1:16–18; even five times 1 Cor 9:15–17.
    ⓓ the general is confirmed by the specific Mk 7:10; Lk 12:52; Ro 7:2; 1 Cor 12:8; —the specific by the general Mt 7:8; 13:12; 22:14; Mk 4:22, 25; Ro 2:2 v.l.
    ⓔ oft. the thought to be supported is not expressed, but must be supplied fr. the context: (He has truly been born) for we have seen his star Mt 2:2. (Let no one refuse) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ Mk 8:35; Lk 9:24. (Let no disciple fail to testify) ὸ̔ς γὰρ ἐὰν ἐπαισχυνθῇ με Mk 8:38. This is common; cp. Ac 13:36; 21:13; 22:26; Ro 8:18; 14:10; 1 Cor 1:18; 5:3; 9:9, 17; 14:9. Sim. w. other particles καὶ γάρ Mt 15:27; 2 Cor 5:2; 13:4; Phil 2:27; 1 Th 3:4; 4:10. καὶ γὰρ οὐ 2 Cor 3:10. μὲν γάρ Ro 2:25; 1 Cor 5:3; 11:7; 2 Cor 9:1; Hb 7:18. οὐ γάρ Mt 9:13; Mk 9:6; Lk 6:43f; Ac 4:20; Ro 8:15; 2 Cor 1:13 (also s. καί 2iα, and μέν 1aα).
    ⓕ oft. in questions, where the English idiom leaves the word untransl., adds then, pray, or prefixes what! or why! to the question (Hyperid., Fgm. 219; Ael. Aristid. 47, 27 K.=23 p. 452 D.; TestJob 23:8 τὶ γὰρ μοι ἡ θρίξ … ; Jos., Bell. 1, 589, Ant. 9, 92) ἱνατί γὰρ … κρίνεται for what reason … should be judged 1 Cor 10:29. ποῖον γὰρ κλέος; what credit is there? 1 Pt 2:20. μὴ γὰρ … ἔρχεται; what! Is the Messiah to hail fr. Galilee? J 7:41. μὴ γὰρ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε; what! Have you no houses? 1 Cor 11:22. S. μή 3a.—ποία γὰρ ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν; what, pray, is your life? Js 4:14 v.l. πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; how in the world can I? Ac 8:31.—Esp. τίς γάρ; τί γάρ; in direct questions: Mt 9:5; 16:26; 23:17, 19 al. τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν; why, what crime has he committed? 27:23; sim. Mk 15:14; Lk 23:22. τί γάρ; transitional, well, then Ro 3:3; what does it matter? Phil 1:18.
    ② marker of clarification, for, you see (Dionys. Hal., De Isocr. p. 542 Raderm.; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 9 p. 373 κοῦφα γὰρ ὄντα; BGU 830, 20 ἐπεὶ γὰρ καὶ γείτων αὐτοῦ εἰμί=since I am also, as you see, his neighbor; Ps.-Demetr. 153 p. 35, 16 R.; Ps.-Callisth. 3, 2, 2 ἐγὼ γάρ=for I) Mt 12:40, 50; 23:3; 24:38; Mk 7:3; Lk 8:40; 9:14; J 3:16; 4:8f; Ro 7:2; Hb 2:8; 3:4; 2 Pt 2:8; AcPlCor 2, 4; 35.—Brief, explanatory parenthetical clauses (En 107:3 μυστηριακῶς γὰρ ἐδήλωσεν αὐτῷ; Diod S 13, 66, 6 ἦν γὰρ ὁ Κλέαρχος χαλεπός) Mt 4:18; Mk 1:16; 2:15; 5:42; 16:4; Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 16:5; Gal. 4:25 v.l. (cp. γὰρ δή 1 Cl 42:5). Akin to explanatory function is the use of γάρ as a narrative marker to express continuation or connection (in later Gk. writers, where more recent users of the texts, not finding the causal force they expect, would often prefer to see it replaced by δέ; unnecessarily, since the grammarian Trypho Alex. [I B.C.], Fgm. 54 ed. AvVelsen 1853 shows clearly that γάρ under certain circumstances εἷς οὖν ἐστὶν ἀντὶ τοῦ δέ=is one and the same thing as δέ). Indeed, in many instances γάρ appears to be used adverbially like our ‘now’ (in which the temporal sense gives way to signal an important point or transition), ‘well, then’, ‘you see’ (e.g. Diod S 20, 35, 1 ‘now’; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. §1; 120; 158; 197 [LDeubner, Bemerkungen z. Text der Vi. Pyth. des Jambl.’35, 30f]; Arrian, Ind. 33, 1 ἀλλὰ ἔπλωον γὰρ … =well, then, they sailed … ; schol. on Od. 4, 22 p. 174, 10 Dind.; ‘moreover’ SIG 1109, 28 [II A.D.]; ‘in the first place’ Jos., Bell. 7, 43, ‘now’ Ant. 1, 68): Ro 1:18; 2:25 (‘indeed’, ‘to be sure’ as Jos., Ant. 11, 8); 4:3, 9; 5:7 (‘but’); 12:3; 14:5; 1 Cor 10:1 (v.l. δέ); 2 Cor 1:12; 10:12; 11:5 (B δέ); Gal 1:11 (v.l. δέ); 5:13; 1 Ti 2:5. Cp. ἡμεῖς γὰρ J 9:28 v.l.—Confirming (Arrian, Ind. 22, 6 ἀλλὰ ἐκπεριπλῶσαι γὰρ … μέγα ἔργον ἐφαίνετο=but to sail seaward seemed indeed a dangerous undertaking; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 192 ἅπασαι μὲν γὰρ … =What has just been stated is apparent from the fact that all …). Especially in replies γάρ confirms what has been asked about (B-D-F §452, 2) yes, indeed; certainly 1 Th 2:20; 1 Cor 9:10.
    ③ marker of inference, certainly, by all means, so, then. In self-evident conclusions, esp. in exclamations, strong affirmations, etc. (Diogenes the Cynic in Diog. L. 6, 47 παῦσαι γάρ=stop, then) μὴ γὰρ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος not for a moment let such a person think Js 1:7; μὴ γάρ τις ὑμῶν πασχέτω by no means let any of you suffer 1 Pt 4:15; ἀναλογίσασθε γὰρ τὸν … ὑπομεμενηκότα yes indeed, consider him who endured Hb 12:3; οὐ γάρ no, indeed! Ac 16:37 (Aristoph., Nub. 232, Ran. 58; Pla., Rep. 492e; Lucian, Jupp. Conf. 16). In weakened sense it is somet. resumptive, esp. in long periodic sentences: ηὐδόκησαν γάρ they decided, then Ro 15:27. ἐλεύθερος γὰρ ὤν though I am free, then 1 Cor 9:19 (cp. vs. 1). Sim. 2 Cor 5:4. Many questions w. γάρ have both inferential and causal force.—S. τοιγαροῦν.—CBird, Some γάρ Clauses in St Mark’s Gospel: JTS n.s. 4, ’53, 171–87.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > γάρ

  • 11 ἄρα

    ἄρα (Hom.+ [s. Kühner-G. II p. 317ff]) transitional/inferential (illative) particle; in older Gk. (Hom., Hdt., Pla., X. et al. [Aristot., Mech. 851a 22 is corrupt]) never at the beginning of its clause (Denniston 41). Strengthened to ἄρα γε Gen 26:9; Mt 7:20; 17:26; Ac 17:27.—LfgrE s.v.; Rob. 1189f and index; s. also Denniston 32–43.
    ⓐ in declarative statement, and w. colloqu. flavor so, then, consequently, you see (B-D-F §451, 2) Ac 11:18. εὑρίσκω ἄ. τὸν νόμον so I find the law Ro 7:21. οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα so there is no condemnation now 8:1. γινώσκετε ἄρα you may be sure, then Gal 3:7. After ἐπεί: for otherwise (B-D-F §456, 3) 1 Cor 5:10; 7:14. After εἰ: if then, if on the other hand (SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα— really is also prob. here); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; s. εἰ 6a.
    ⓑ freq. in questions which draw an inference fr. what precedes; but oft. simply to enliven the question (Jos., Ant. 6, 200; B-D-F §440, 2) τίς ἄρα who then Mt 18:1; 19:25; 24:45; Mk 4:41; Lk 8:25; 12:42; 22:23. τί ἄ. what then Mt 19:27; Lk 1:66; Ac 12:18; Hm 11:2; GJs 13:1; AcPl Ha 5, 20; 7, 2 and 3 (cp. GrBar 4:12). εἰ ἄρα then (X., An. 3, 2, 22) Ac 7:1 v.l.; οὐκ ἄ. are you not, then Ac 21:38; μήτι ἄ. 2 Cor 1:17. After οὖν 1 Cl 35:3; B 15:7. S. also 3 below.
    ⓐ then, as a result w. suggestion of emphasis (Herm. Wr. 11, 13 ed. Nock; B-D-F §451, 2d) Mt 12:28; Lk 11:20; 1 Cor 15:14; 2 Cor 5:14; Gal 2:21; 3:29; 5:11; Hb 12:8; 2 Cl 14:4; B 6:19; IEph 8:1. Also 1 Cor 15:18 ἄ. is used to emphasize a further result, and continues the apodosis of vs. 17.
    ⓑ at the beg. of a sentence: so, as a result, consequently Lk 11:48; Ro 10:17; 2 Cor 7:12; Hb 4:9. Strengthened to ἄρα γε (Gen 26:9) Mt 7:20; 17:26; to ἄρα οὖν (never elided) so then; here ἄ. expresses the inference and οὖν the transition Ro 5:18; 7:3, 25 (s. ἆρα); 8:12; 9:16, 18; 14:12, 19; Gal 6:10; Eph 2:19; 1 Th 5:6; 2 Th 2:15; 2 Cl 8:6; 14:3; B 9:6; 10:2; ITr 10.
    ③ to express someth. tentative, perhaps, conceivably.—KClark, Gingrich Festschr. ’72, 70–84 (w. survey fr. LXX to Mod. Gk.): in addition to its inferential mng., ἄρα is employed in the context of the tentative, the uncertain, the unresolved, the contingent, e.g. possibly Ac 12:18; conceivably Mk 4:41, or it may be rendered by a phrase: would you say? Mt 24:45 (on these three last pass. s. 1b).—Also in indirect questions εἰ ἄ. whether (perhaps) (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); s. εἰ 6a.—JGrimm, Die Partikel ἄρα im frühen griech. Epos, Glotta 40, ’62, 3–41; Denniston 32–43; JBlomqvist, Gk. Particles in Hell. Prose, diss. Lund, ’69.—EDNT. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἄρα

  • 12 κᾱραβος

    κά̄ραβος
    Grammatical information: m.
    Meaning: 1. `a prickly crustacean' (Epich., Ar., Arist.; cf. Thompson Fishes s. v.), metaph. a light canoo (EM); 2. `a horned beetle' (Arist.).
    Derivatives: καραβίς `kind of sea-crab' (Gal., Sch.), καράβιον = ἐφόλκιον (H. s. ἐφόλκια, sch.); prob. also καραβαία δίκρουν ξύλον H. (s. Grošelj Razprave 2, 11). - Beside it κηραφίς = καραβίς (Nic. Al. 394) (sec. after the names in - φ(ο)-; and epic language imitating η for α?).
    Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]
    Etymology: Unknown; cf. Cohen BSL 27 (1927) 100, wo gives several similar Arabic words. Acc. to Bq s. v. - βος un-Greek (Macedonian) for Gr. - φος \< IE. - bho-. Fur. (index s.v.) connects several words; first there is καρβάρεοι κάραβοι; then there is a prenasalized form καράμβιος (Ar. Byz. Epit. 9, 11; v.l. Arist. HA 551b17), and κεράμβυξ s.v. (Nic. Fr. 39, H.) and κεράμβηλον Η. (- ηλο- is well known from Pre-Greek), which cannot be derived from κέρας (as Frisk suggests). He further posits *σκαραβαῖος on the basis of Lat. scarabaeus, which seems unavoidable. The form σκορόβυλος no doubt continues *σκαραβ-υλ-, where the α's turned to - ο- before the - υ- in the following syllable (Fur. 340 discusses the phenomenon, but did not see that it operated here); so here we have evidence for σκαραβ. Then there is γραψαῖος (Diph. Siph. ap. Ath. 3, 106d) = κάραβος, which he assumes to stand for *γαρψαῖος (doubtful, s.v.). Further s. on σκορπίος (which in my view does not belong here). It is clear that we have here a Pre-Greek word with several of its usual variants. So we have * (s)karab-. - From κάραβος Lat. cārabus `crab', `small boat' (with Rom., e. g. Fr. caravelle) and a Slavic word for `ship', e. g. Russ. koráblь; s. Vasmer Russ. et. Wb. s. v. with lit. and crit.
    Page in Frisk: 1,785

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > κᾱραβος

  • 13 εἰ

    εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.
    A

    ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10

     H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.
    A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper.,

    εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262

    ; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.
    2 in wishes, c. opt.,

    ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111

    , cf. 24.74; so later,

    εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863

     (lyr.);

    εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836

    : more freq. folld. by

    γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189

    , al.;

    εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d

    ; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt.,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825

    ;

    Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29

    ; later with past tenses of ind.,

    εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152

     (anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands),

    αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311

    , cf. 24.376.
    b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions,

    εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33

    ;

    εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157

    ;

    ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537

     (lyr.);

    εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46

    : later c. inf.,

    γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284

     (Crin.).
    c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes,

    αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84

    ; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.
    d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use),

    εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    .
    B IN CONDITIONS, if:
    I with INDIC.,
    1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi,

    εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7

    ;

    εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526

    ;

    εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a

    ;

    κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579

    , cf. Od.17.475;

    εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c

    ;

    εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b

    , cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.
    b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres.,

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943

    : with [tense] impf.,

    εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10

    : rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.
    2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically,

    εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19

    ;

    εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91

    ; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings,

    εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5

    ;

    εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c

    , cf. D.28.21: or,
    b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485

    , cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.
    3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.
    a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9;

    αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28

    ; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.
    b with [tense] aor. referring to past time,

    εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38

    ; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4;

    καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d

    , cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi,

    εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a

    .
    c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.
    II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects,

    αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6

     ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt.,

    εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13

    ; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21

    ;

    εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c

    : in later Prose,

    εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5

    ;

    εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9

    , cf. Procl. Inst.26.
    1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549;

    ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11

    ; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.
    2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted,

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81

    .
    b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.
    III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),
    1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223;

    εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979

    ;

    οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11

    ;

    οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37

    , etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.
    b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also

    εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c

    .
    2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom.,

    εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768

    ; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66;

    ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755

    . For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence,

    ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3

    .
    3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145;

    ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5

    .
    4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v.

    ἄν A. 111

    . d).
    IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt.,

    εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129

    ;

    εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64

    , cf. 172, 3.105, 108.
    V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43;

    οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147

    : after past tenses,

    ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13

    ;

    δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33

    ;

    ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a

    ;

    οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105

    : in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη)

    εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157

    ;

    ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7

    ; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found,

    ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55

    ;

    δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121

    ;

    τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d

    , etc.
    VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.;

    εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321

    ; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.
    VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:
    1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.
    2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.
    3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:
    a εἰ μή except,

    οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200

    ; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only,

    ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73

    , cf. 1.45, 2.20;

    εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17

    , Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical,

    εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    ;

    εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13

    .
    b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise,

    προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37

    , cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433;

    ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35

    ;

    οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6

    , cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.
    c εἰ δέ sts. stands for

    εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c

    , cf. Smp. 212c;

    εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722

    ;

    εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24

    ; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.
    d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.
    e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any,

    τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5

    ;

    ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8

    , cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.;

    εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2

    , etc.;

    εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d

    ; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).
    f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever,

    ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20

    , cf. Ar.Eq. 594;

    αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11

    , cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers,

    εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39

    .
    g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.);

    εἴ που Od.4.193

    .
    h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1),

    πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58

    .
    VIII with other PARTICLES:
    2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.
    3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.
    IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.
    C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:
    1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183;

    εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41

    .
    2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical,

    ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75

    .
    3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a;

    ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60

    : rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.
    4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.
    5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause,

    ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7

    ;

    σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d

    ; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a;

    πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a

    , 313b;

    ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9

    ; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ

  • 14 κύριος

    1
    I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.
    2
    II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.
    ① one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).
    ⓐ of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.
    ⓑ w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.
    ② one who is in a position of authority, lord, master
    ⓐ of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.
    ⓑ of transcendent beings
    α. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).
    β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.
    γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:
    א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.
    ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).
    ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.
    δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.
    ε. of other transcendent beings
    א. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.
    ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κύριος

  • 15 πρῶτος

    πρῶτος, η, ον (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.).
    ① pert. to being first in a sequence, inclusive of time, set (number), or space, first of several, but also when only two persons or things are involved (=πρότερος; exx. in Hdb. on J 1:15; Rdm.2 71f; Thackeray 183; s. also Mlt. 79; 245; B-D-F §62; Rob. 516; 662; and s. Mt 21:31 v.l.).
    ⓐ of time first, earliest, earlier
    α. as adj. ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν Phil 1:5; cp. Ac 20:18 (on the absence of the art. [also Phil 1:5 v.l.] s. B-D-F §256; Rob. 793). ἡ πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16 (MMeinertz, Worauf bezieht sich die πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16?: Biblica 4, 1923, 390–94). ἡ πρ. διαθήκη Hb 9:15. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἡ ἀνάστασις ἡ πρώτη 20:5f. ἡ πρώτη ὅρασις Hv 3, 10, 3; 3, 11, 2; 4. ἡ ἐκκλησία ἡ πρ. 2 Cl 14:1.—Subst. τὰ πρ. … τὰ ἔσχατα (Job 8:7): γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων Mt 12:45; cp. Lk 11:26; 2 Pt 2:20; Hv 1, 4, 2. οἱ πρῶτοι (those who came earlier, as Artem. 2, 9 p. 93, 19 those who appeared earlier) Mt 20:10; cp. vs. 8. ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων 21:36. Cp. 27:64. πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν the first to rise from the dead Ac 26:23. ὁ πρῶτος the first one J 5:4; 1 Cor 14:30. On the self-designation of the Risen Lord ὁ πρ. καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος Rv 1:17; 2:8; 22:13; s. ἔσχατος 2b (πρ. of God: Is 44:6; 48:12).—As a predicate adj., where an adv. can be used in English (ParJer 1:8 εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ πρῶτος ἀνοίξω τὰς πύλας; B-D-F §243; Rob. 657), as the first one = first ἦλθεν πρῶτος he was the first one to come = he came first J 20:4; cp. vs. 8. πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει Ro 10:19. Ἀβραὰμ πρῶτος περιτομὴν δούς Abraham was the first to practice circumcision B 9:7. οἱ ἄγγελοι οἱ πρῶτοι κτισθέντες the angels who were created first Hv 3, 4, 1; Hs 5, 5, 3.—1 Ti 2:13; 1J 4:19; AcPlCor 2:9.—ἐν ἐμοὶ πρώτῳ in me as the first 1 Ti 1:16.—Used w. a gen. of comparison (Ocelus Luc. 3 ἐκεῖνο πρῶτον τοῦ παντός ἐστιν=prior to the All; Manetho 1, 329; Athen. 14, 28 p. 630c codd.) πρῶτός μου ἦν he was earlier than I = before me J 1:15, 30 (PGM 13, 543 σοῦ πρῶτός εἰμι.—Also Ep. 12 of Apollonius of Tyana: Philostrat. I p. 348, 30 τὸ τῇ τάξει δεύτερον οὐδέποτε τῇ φύσει πρῶτον). So perh. also ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν 15:18 (s. β below) and πάντων πρώτη ἐκτίσθη Hv 2, 4, 1.—As a rule the later element is of the same general nature as the one that precedes it. But it can also be someth. quite different, even its exact opposite: τὴν πρώτην πίστιν ἠθέτησαν 1 Ti 5:12. τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες Rv 2:4.—Used elliptically ἡ πρώτη (i.e. ἡμέρα sim. Polyb. 5, 19, 1; 18, 27, 2 τῇ πρώτῃ) τῶν ἀζύμων Mt 26:17. πρώτῃ σαββάτου on the first day of the week Mk 16:9. In some of the passages mentioned above the idea of sequence could be predom.
    β. the neuter πρῶτον as adv., of time first, in the first place, before, earlier, to begin with (Peripl. Eryth. 4; Chariton 8, 2, 4; ApcEsdr 3:11; Just., D. 2, 4) πρῶτον πάντων first of all Hv 5:5a. ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν καὶ θάψαι let me first go and bury Mt 8:21. συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια gather the weeds first 13:30. Cp. 17:10, 11 v.l.; Mk 7:27; 9:11f; 13:10; Lk 9:59, 61; 12:1 ( first Jesus speaks to his disciples, and only then [vs. 15] to the people. If one prefers to take πρ. w. what follows, as is poss., it has mng. 2a); 14:28, 31; J 7:51; 18:13; Ac 26:20; Ro 15:24 al. in NT; B 15:7; Hv 3, 1, 8; 3, 6, 7; 3, 8, 11; 5:5b. τότε πρῶτον then for the first time Ac 11:26 D. πρῶτον … καὶ τότε first … and then (Sir 11:7; Jos., Ant. 13, 187) Mt 5:24; 7:5; 12:29; Mk 3:27; Lk 6:42; IEph 7:2. τότε is correlative w. πρῶτον without καί J 2:10 v.l. Likew. πρῶτον … εἶτα (εἶτεν) first … then (Just., D. 33, 2 al.; s. εἶτα 1) Mk 4:28; 1 Ti 3:10; B 6:17. πρῶτον … ἔπειτα (ἔπειτα 2) 1 Cor 15:46; 1 Th 4:16. πρῶτον … μετὰ ταῦτα Mk 16:9, s. vs. 12. πρῶτον … εἶτα … μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Cl 23:4; 2 Cl 11:3 (in both cases the same prophetic saying of unknown origin). πρῶτον … ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ Ac 7:12.—Pleonastically πρῶτον πρὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου Lk 11:38.—W. gen. (Chariton 5, 4, 9 cod. πρῶτον τ. λόγων=before it comes to words) ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν it hated me before ( it hated) you J 15:18 (but s. 1aα).—W. the art. τὸ πρῶτον (Hom. et al.; Jos., Ant. 8, 402; 14, 205) the first time J 10:40; 19:39; at first (Diod S 1, 85, 2; Jos., Ant. 2, 340) 12:16; 2 Cl 9:5. τὰ πρῶτα (Hom. et al.; Appian, Syr. 15 §64; Ps.-Phoc. 8) the first time, at first MPol 8:2.
    ⓑ of number or sequence (the area within which this sense is valid cannot be marked off w. certainty from the area 1aα)
    α. as adj. Mt 21:28; 22:25; Mk 12:20; Lk 14:18; 16:5; 19:16; 20:29; J 19:32; Ac 12:10; 13:33 v.l.; Rv 4:7; 8:7; 21:19; Hs 9, 1, 5. τὸ πρῶτον … τὸ δεύτερον (Alex. Aphr., An. p. 28, 9 Br.) Hb 10:9. On πρώτης τῆς μερίδος Μακεδονίας πόλις Ac 16:12 s. μερίς 1 and RAscough, NTS 44, ’98, 93–103.—Since πρῶτος can stand for πρότερος (s. 1 at beg.; also Mlt-Turner 32), it by no means follows from τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον Ac 1:1 that the writer of Luke and of Ac must have planned to write a third book (Zahn, NKZ 28, 1917, 373ff, Comm. 1919, 16ff holds that he planned to write a third volume; against this view s. EGoodspeed, Introd. to the NT ’37, 189; Haenchen, et al.—Athenaeus 15, 701c mentions the first of Clearchus’ two books on proverbs with the words ἐν τῷ προτέρῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν, but 10, 457c with ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν. Diod S 1, 42, 1 the first half of a two-part work is called ἡ πρώτη βίβλος and 3, 1, 1 mentions a division into πρώτη and δευτέρα βίβ. In 13, 103, 3 the designation for the first of two works varies between ἡ πρώτη σύνταξις and ἡ προτέρα ς. See Haenchen on Ac 1:1).—πρῶτος is also used without any thought that the series must continue: τὸν πρῶτον ἰχθύν the very first fish Mt 17:27. αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ πρώτη ἐγένετο Lk 2:2, likewise, does not look forward in the direction of additional censuses, but back to a time when there were none at all (Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 227 D. παράκλησις αὕτη [=challenge to a sea-fight] πρώτη ἐγένετο; for interpolation theory s. JWinandy, RB 104, ’97, 372–77; cp. BPearson, CBQ, ’99, 262--82).—τὰ τείχη τὰ πρῶτα Hs 8, 6, 6 does not contrast the ‘first walls’ w. other walls; rather it distinguishes the only walls in the picture (Hs 8, 7, 3; 8, 8, 3) as one edifice, from the tower as the other edifice.
    β. adv., the neuter πρῶτον of sequence in enumerations (not always clearly distinguished fr. sense 1aβ) first πρῶτον ἀποστόλους, δεύτερον προφήτας, τρίτον … 1 Cor 12:28 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 20 II, 10ff [II A.D.] τὸ πρ. … τὸ δεύτερον … τὸ τρίτον. Without the art. 480, 12ff [II A.D.]; Diod S 36, 7, 3; Tat. 40, 1). See Hb 7:2; Js 3:17.—Not infrequently Paul begins w. πρῶτον μέν without continuing the series, at least in form (B-D-F §447, 4; Rob. 1152. For πρ. without continuation s. Plat., Ep. 7, 337b, Plut., Mor. 87b; Jos., Ant. 1, 182; Ath. 27, 1 πρῶτα μέν) Ro 1:8; 3:2; 1 Cor 11:18. S. also 2 Cl 3:1.
    ⓒ of space outer, anterior σκηνὴ ἡ πρώτη the outer tent, i.e. the holy place Hb 9:2; cp. vss. 6, 8.
    ② pert. to prominence, first, foremost, most important, most prominent
    ⓐ adj.
    α. of things (Ocellus [II B.C.] 56 Harder [1926] πρώτη κ. μεγίστη φυλακή; Ael. Aristid. 23, 43 K.=42 p. 783 D.: πόλεις; Ezk 27:22; PsSol 17:43; χρυσίον τὸ πρῶτον τίμιον; JosAs 15:10) ἡ μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή Mt 22:38; cp. Mk 12:29. ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων vs. 28 (OLehmann, TU 73, ’59, 557–61 [rabb.]; CBurchard, ZNW 61, ’70, cites JosAs 15:10; 18:5). Without superl. force ἐντολὴ πρώτη ἐν ἐπαγγελίᾳ a commandment of great importance, with a promise attached Eph 6:2 (the usual transl. ‘first commandment w. a promise’ [NRSV, REB et al.] loses sight of the fact that Ex 20:4–6=Dt 5:8–10 has an implied promise of the same kind as the one in Ex 20:12=Dt 5:16. πρ. here is best taken in the same sense as in Mk 12:29 above). στολὴν τὴν πρώτην the special robe Lk 15:22 (JosAs 15:10).—ἐν πρώτοις among the first = most important things, i.e. as of first importance 1 Cor 15:3 (Pla., Pol. 522c ὸ̔ καὶ παντὶ ἐν πρώτοις ἀνάγκη μανθάνειν; Epict., Ench. 20; Mitt-Wilck I/2, 14 II, 9 ἐν πρώτοις ἐρωτῶ σε; Josh 9:2d).
    β. of persons (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 35 πρ. καὶ μέγιστος θεός; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 18 [Stone p. 64]; ApcSed 5:2; Jos., Ant. 15, 398; Just., A I, 60, 5 al. τὸν πρῶτον θεόν) ὸ̔ς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος whoever wishes to be the first among you Mt 20:27; Mk 10:44; cp. 9:35. πρῶτος Σίμων Mt 10:2 is not meant to indicate the position of Simon in the list, since no other numbers follow, but to single him out as the most prominent of the twelve. W. gen. ὧν (=τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) πρῶτός εἰμι 1 Ti 1:15. Pl. (οἱ) πρῶτοι in contrast to (οἱ) ἔσχατοι Mt 19:30; 20:16; Mk 9:35; 10:31; Lk 13:30; Ox 654, 25f (cp. GTh 4; sim. Sallust. 9 p. 16, 21f τοῖς ἐσχάτοις … τοῖς πρώτοις; s. ἔσχατος 2).—αἱ πρώται prominent women (in the phrase γυναικῶν τε τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι) Ac 17:4 (s. New Docs 1, 72). οἱ πρῶτοι the most prominent men, the leading men w. gen. of place (Jos., Ant. 7, 230 τῆς χώρας) οἱ πρ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mk 6:21; cp. Ac 13:50 (in phrasing sim. to πολλὰς μὲν γυναῖκας εὐγενεῖς καὶ τῶν πρώτων ἀνδρῶν ἤισχυναν=‘they dishonored many well-born women as well as men of high station’ Theopomp.: 115 Fgm. 121 Jac. p. 563, 33f), or of a group (Strabo 13, 2, 3 οἱ πρ. τῶν φίλων; Jos., Ant. 20, 180) οἱ πρ. τοῦ λαοῦ (Jos., Ant. 11, 141) Lk 19:47; cp. Ac 25:2; 28:17. On ὁ πρῶτος τῆς νήσου vs. 7 (πρῶτος Μελιταίων IGR I, 512=IG XIV, 601; cp. CB I/2, 642 no. 535 ὁ πρῶτος ἐν τῇ πόλει; p. 660 no. 616; SEG XLI, 1345, 14f; cp. CIL X, 7495, 1; s. Hemer, Acts 153, n. 152; Warnecke, Romfahrt 119ff) s. Πόπλιος.
    ⓑ adv. πρῶτον of degree in the first place, above all, especially (Jos., Ant. 10, 213) ζητεῖτε πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν Mt 6:33. Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι Ro 1:16; cp. 2:9f.—Ac 3:26; 2 Pt 1:20; 3:3. Of the Macedonian Christians ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν πρῶτον τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ ἡμῖν they gave themselves first of all to the Lord, and (then) to us 2 Cor 8:5. παρακαλῶ πρῶτον πάντων first of all I urge 1 Ti 2:1.—B. 939. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρῶτος

  • 16 οὗτος

    οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen. τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual fem. never in [dialect] Att., v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, init.:—demonstr. Pron.,
    A this, common from Hom. downwds.
    A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο prob. arose from a reduplication of the demonstr. ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of - υ- (= Skt. Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα fr. τα-υ-τα: [dialect] Dor. gen. sg. fem.

    τούτας Philol.11

    ; nom. pl.

    τοῦτοι, ταῦται A.D.Synt.111.23

    : the former occurs Sophr.24, GDI 3045 B 6 ([place name] Selinus), SIG339.16 (Rhodes, iii B. C.), etc., the latter is dub. in Sophr.97, certain in SIG 241 B117 (Delph., iv B. C.): in [dialect] Boeot. all forms begin with οὑτ-, as gen. sg. neut.

    οὕτω Supp.Epigr.3.359.11

     (iii B. C.); acc. sg. fem.

    οὕταν Corinn. Supp.2.80

    ; acc. pl. neut.

    οὗτα SIG1185.20

     (Tanagra, iii B. C.), etc.: gen. pl. fem. [dialect] Att. τούτων, Cret.

    ταυτᾶν Leg.Gort.5.19

    ; neut.

    ταύτων Michel 1334.10

     (Elis, iv B. C.).—In [dialect] Ion. sts. written ταότην, ταο̄τα, SIG283.19 (Chios, iv B. C.), 46.7 (Halic., v B. C.), al.—In [dialect] Att. οὗτος was freq. strengthd. by the demonstr. -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, gen. τουτουί, dat. τουτῳί, acc. τουτονί; pl. nom. οὑτοιί, neut. ταυτί, etc., this man here: sts. a Particle is inserted between the Pron. and -ί, as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, Ar.Ach. 784; τουτογί for τουτί γε, Id.V. 781, Av. 894, al.; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, Id.Eq. 492, Pax 1057, al.; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, Id.Pl. 227; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, Id.Ra. 965.—In codd. the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sts. added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be [dialect] Att. by A.D.Pron.59.24, 82.11. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη?οὗτοςXί, τουτω?οὗτοςXί, οὑτοῐί, Ar.Nu. 201, Pl.44, Ach.40, etc.]
    B USAGE in regard to CONCORD. οὗτος is freq. used as a Pron. Subst.: hence neut. is folld. by gen.,

    κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος Hdt. 1.84

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν D.4.37

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ἥκεις μανίας Id.36.48

    ;

    ταῦτα τῶν μαθημάτων Pl.Euthd. 278b

    : but quite as freq. as Adj., in which case its Subst. commonly takes the Art., οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος.—But the Art. is absent,
    1 always in [dialect] Ep. Poets (exc. Od.18.114),

    οὗτος ἀνήρ Il.14.471

    , Od.1.406, etc.: sts. also in Trag., A.Pers. 122 (lyr.), 495, S.Ph. 406, OC 471, 1177: once in an Inscr., τοπεῖα:

    τούτων τὰ ἡμίσεα τοπείων IG22.1622.135

     (iv B. C.).
    2 sts. when the Noun is so specified that the Art. is not needed,

    ἐς γῆν ταύτην.., ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται Hdt.4.8

    ;

    ταύτας ἃς οἱ πατέρες παρέδοσαν μελέτας Th. 1.85

    , cf. Pl.R. 449d, etc.;

    πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος, ὃν θρηνεῖς ἀεί S.El. 530

    .
    3 when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, v. infr. c. 1.5.
    4 when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate,

    αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις S.Ph. 1034

    ; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι] Pl.Ap. 18a: this exception extends to cases in which the Predicate is not so distinctly separated from the Subject, αἰτίαι μὲν αὗται προυγεγένηντο these were the grievances which already existed, Th.1.66; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which.., Pl.Phlb. 16c: freq. with a [comp] Sup., κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη δὴ.. ἐγένετο this was notably the greatest movement which.., Th.1.1, cf. 3.113: with

    πρῶτος Id.1.55

    ,98, 6.31, Ev.Luc. 2.2.
    5 when [ per.] 3rd pers. is used for [ per.] 2nd to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, Pl.Grg. 467b, 489b, etc.
    II though οὗτος usu. agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neut.,

    μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ' ἐστί E.Ba. 305

    ;

    τοῦτο γάρ εἰσι.. εὔθυναι D.19.82

    , etc.: and in pl.,

    οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή Aeschin. 3.13

    ;

    ταῦτ' ἐστὶν ὁ προδότης Id.2.166

    : so with an explanatory clause added,

    τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν D.57.34

    .
    2 so also with a Noun in apposition,

    τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή Od.1.159

    ;

    τούτου τιμῶμαι, ἐν πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl.Ap. 36e

    , cf. E.Fr.323.3, etc.
    3 the neut. also may refer to a masc. or fem. Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. Hdt.4.23, cf. X.An.1.5.10, etc.
    4 the neut. is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι:

    τοῦτο δ' εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός Ar.Eq. 854

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 711a; or of an abstract fact,

    οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζῇ;—τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ' ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν Ar.Ra.73

    .
    III with Prons.,
    1 personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, v. infr. c.1.5.
    2 interrog., τί τοῦτ' ἔλεξας; what is this that.. ? S.Ph. 1173 (lyr.), cf. Ant.7; ποίοισι τούτοις; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα]; Id.OC 388, cf.Ant. 1049; Νέστορ' ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, Il.11.612.
    3 with οἷος, Od.20.377, Pl.Phd. 61c.
    4 possess., πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, S.El. 530, cf. X.An.7.3.30.
    5 demonstr., οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, Hdt.1.32;

    τοῦτ' ἔστ' ἐκεῖνο E. Hel. 622

    , cf. Or. 804; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, v. αὐτός 1.7; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, S.Ph. 128.
    b exceptionally,

    Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ' ἐστὶ τύπος IG12(5).300

     ([place name] Paros).
    IV with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, Lys.7.10codd.; [στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, D.8.2, cf. 3.4;

    τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν Men.Epit.27

    ;

    ταύτας τριάκοντα μνᾶς D.27.23

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 463b, etc.
    C SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS:
    I this, to designate the nearer, opp. ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, Pl.Phd. 75e (v. l.); cf. ὅδε init.: but οὗτος sts. indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ.. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. D.8.72, cf. 51.3 and 18.
    2 when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε prop. refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes,

    οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ', ἀλλά σοι τάδ' ἔστι S.OC 787

    , cf. ὅδε III. 2: freq., however, where there are not two things, οὗτος refers to what follows, Il. 13.377, Od.2.306, etc.; οὔκουν.. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι .. ; A.Pr. 379, etc.
    3 οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ' ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, S.El. 301;

    τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας Pl.Cri. 45a

    ; so D.de Coron. uses οὗτος of Aeschines, ἐκεῖνος of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, D.2.15, 4.3.
    b of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, X.An.1.5.8;

    οἱ τὰς τελετὰς.. οὗτοι καταστήσαντες Pl.Phd. 69c

    , cf. Men. 80a; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, Thphr.HP3.7.3, cf. 3.18.11, 4.7.1;

    οἱ τὰς κόρας ταύτας ὠνούμενοι τοῖς παισίν D.Chr.31.153

    .
    4 in [dialect] Att. law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in Aeschin. 2.130 ) or defendant (as in Id.1.1); so, in the political speeches of D., οὗτοι are the opposite party, 4.1, 8.7, etc.; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι freq. means the judges, the court, 21.134, 36.47.
    5 much like an Adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ' οὗτος κατὰ νῆας.. ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest.. ? Il.10.82; freq. in [dialect] Att., τίς οὑτοσί; who's this here? Ar.Ach. 1048; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, X.An.3.5.9 (as v.l.): with Pron. of 2 pers., οὗτος σύ ho you! you there! S.OT 532, 1121, E.Hec. 1280, etc.: and then οὗτος alone like a voc., οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; A.Supp. 911,cf.S.Aj.71, E.Alc. 773, Ar.Eq. 240, Nu. 220, al.: with a pr. n.,

    ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας S.Aj.89

    ;

    ὦ οὗτος οὗτος, Οἰδίπους Id.OC 1627

    , cf. Ar.V. 1364: with voc.,

    βέντισθ' οὗτος Theoc.5.76

    :—the fem. is rarer,

    αὕτη E.Med. 922

    ;

    αὕτη σύ Ar.Th. 610

    .—This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn.
    II simply as antec. to ὅς, Od.2.40, S.OT 1180, etc.: freq. following relat. clause,

    ἅ γ' ἔλαβες,.. μεθεῖναι ταῦτα Id.Ph. 1247

    , cf. 1319,Ant. 183, 203, Pl.Grg. 469c.
    III = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι Pi.O. 4.26;

    σὺ τοίνυν οὗτος εὑρέθης D.18.282

    , cf. 173.
    IV after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is freq. emphat. repeated by

    οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης.., οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω.. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.4.16

    , cf.81 (s. v. l.), 1.146, Pl.Phd. 107d, etc.
    V καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word,

    ξυνεστῶτες.. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους Th.4.55

    , cf. Hdt.1.147, 6.11, etc.; so

    οὐδὲ τούτου Aeschin.2.100

    ; v. infr. VIII.2.
    VI repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it,

    τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν.. κελαδοῦντες Ar.Ra. 1526

    , cf. Pl.La. 200d.
    VII ταῦτα is used in some special phrases,
    1 ταῦτ', ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), Ar.V. 142, Pax 275, cf. Eq.III; so

    ταῦτα δή Id.Ach. 815

    ;

    ταῦτά νυν Id.V. 1008

    ; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, E.Ph. 417.
    3 καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, freq. in [dialect] Att., as Pl.Smp. 220c.
    4 ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc., prob. short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς ( = -εὶς) ἀθάνατος:

    ταῦτα IG14.420

    ; Προκόπι ταῦτα ib.1824; χαίρεται ( = -τε) ταῦτα ib.1479, etc.: similarly perh. in a letter,

    ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω. ταῦτα POxy.119.15

     (ii/iii A. D.).
    VIII Adverbial usages:
    1 ταῦταabs., therefore, that is why.., Il.11.694;

    ταῦτ' ἄρα Ar.Ach.90

    ,Nu. 319, 335, 394, al., X.Smp.4.55;

    ταῦτα δή A.Pers. 159

    , Pl.Smp. 174a;

    ταῦτ' οὖν S.Tr. 550

    , Ar.V. 1358, etc.; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e: τοῦτο is rare in this sense,

    τοῦτ' ἀφικόμην, ὅπως.. εὖ πράξαιμί τι S. OT 1005

    ; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, Pl.Smp. 204a.
    b πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, prop. used in indignant defiance, A.Pr. 992, 1043, S.Aj. 971, 1115, 1313, OT 426, OC 455, etc.
    2 καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that,

    ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός A.Eu. 627

    : but mostly with a part.,

    ὅς γ' ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ.., καὶ ταῦθ' ὑφ' ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον S.OT37

    , cf. Ar.Ra. 704, Pl.Phdr. 241e, etc.; or with a part. omitted, ἥτις.. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (sc. οὖσα) S.El. 614; so

    καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι Pl.Erx. 400b

    .
    b καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, Id.R. 341c, cf. Diod.Com.3.5.
    3 τοῦτο μέν.., τοῦτο δέ .. on the one hand.., on the other.., partly.., partly.., very freq. in Hdt., as 1.161, al.; τοῦτο μέν is sts. answered by δέ only, 4.76, S.Aj. 670, OC 440; by δὲ αὖ, Hdt.7.176; by ἔπειτα δέ, S.Ant.61; by ἀλλά, D.22.13; by εἶτα, S.Ph. 1345; by τοῦτ' αὖθις, Id.Ant. 165.
    4 dat. fem. ταύτῃ,
    a on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν.., τῇδε δ' αὖ .. Id.Ph. 1331;

    ἀλλ' ἐὰν ταύτῃ γε νικᾷ, ταυτῃὶ πεπλήξεται Ar.Eq. 271

    , cf. Th. 1221.
    b in this point, herein,

    μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς Id.Pl. 572

    , cf. X.Hier.7.12, etc.
    c in this way, thus, A.Pr. 191, S.OC 1300, etc.;

    οὐ.. ταῦτ' ἐστί πω ταύτῃ Ar.Eq. 843

    ;

    ἀλλ' οὔτι ταύτῃ ταῦτα E. Med. 365

    , cf. A.Pr. 511: antec. to ὥσπερ, Pl.R. 330c; to ὅπῃ, X.Cyr. 8.3.2;

    οὕτω τε καὶ ταύτῃ γίγνοιτο Pl.Lg. 681d

    ; καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ ἂν ἔχοι ib. 714d; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc., like οὕτω κ., Sch.Pl.Smp. 215b.
    5 ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, X.HG3.1.6, Oec.2.1; therefore, Id.An.3.3.5.
    b in the meantime, Hdt.1.126, Th.3.72, X.Mem.2.1.27.
    7 πρὸς τούτοις ([etym.] - οισι) besides, Hdt.2.51, Pl.Prt. 326a, X.Mem.2.4.4, Ar.Pl. 540.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὗτος

  • 17 κήρ

    κήρ, κηρός
    Grammatical information: f.
    Meaning: `death, doom', often personified `goddess or demon of death' (Il.), in plur. `types of death, accidents'; see Nilsson Gr. Rel. 1, 222ff., v. Wilamowitz Glaube 1, 271ff.
    Compounds: Compp. z. B. κηρεσσι-φόρητος `by the Keres driven (into death)' (Q 527; Schwyzer 446, Pfister Würzb. Jb. 3, 406f.), κηρι-τρεφεῖς `brought up for death' ( ἄνθρωποι, Hes. Op. 418), κηρο-τρόφος `feeding death, deadly' ( ὄφις, Nic. Th. 192); ἐπί-κηρος `fallen to death' (Hp., Arist., hell.); also ἀ-κήρ-ατος with ἀκηράσιος and ἀ-κήρ-ιος `unharmed', s. 1. ἀκήρατος and Sommer Nominalkomp. 152.
    Derivatives: κηρέσιον ὀλέθριον, νοσηρόν H. (after θεσπέσιος); κηραίνω `damage, destroy' (A. Supp. 999, Ph.; after πημαίνω), κηρόομαι `be injured' (EM).
    Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]
    Etymology: A root noun, which has been derived from κεραΐζω; Sanskrit and Celtic have a root aorist (s. on κεραΐζω); so κήρ would prop. be an agent noun "the destroyer". The disyll. root however, is a problem: we would expect *κηρας (cf. γῆρας \< *ǵērh₂-s). Problematic is further the long vowel α in Alc. ( κᾶρι B 6 A 7) and Alcm. ( κᾶρα Fr. 56; trad. κάραν), PGr. *κά̄ρ (cf. κάρ θάνατος H.). Also καριῶσαι ἀποκτεῖναι and ἐκαρίωσας ἀπέκτεινας H. have α which will have been long (there is no evidence for short α. Then we have the old Attic saying θύραζε Κᾶρες, οὑκ ἔτ' Άνθεστήρια. That Κᾶρες meant `Carians', i.e. `slaves' is clearly an aetological story invented to explain the α. See also Brunel PPh. 41 (1967) 81-104.) Opposed to κᾶρι, κᾶρα in Alc. and Alcm. stand κῆρες and κήρ both in Pi. Fr. 277 and in the choral songs of the tragedy. The suggestion of an ablauting paradigm κήρ, *κᾰρός (not retained in ἐν καρὸς αἴσῃ, s. καρός) with a secondary nom. *κά̄ρ (Ehrlich Sprachgesch. 9f.) cannot be maintained. The conclusion is that the long α is original; the η is simply the IA development of the long α (which was spread over a larger area). The word, then, is Pre-Greek, as may be expected for such an archaic idea: there is no IE root *kār-. Beekes, xxx, 200x, ppp - ppp. Lee Glotta 39 (1961) 191-207 and Ramat Arch. glottol. it. 50 (1965) 137ff. derive the word from κείρω, which is hardly probable.
    Page in Frisk: 1,842-843

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > κήρ

  • 18 κηρός (1)

    κήρ, κηρός
    Grammatical information: f.
    Meaning: `death, doom', often personified `goddess or demon of death' (Il.), in plur. `types of death, accidents'; see Nilsson Gr. Rel. 1, 222ff., v. Wilamowitz Glaube 1, 271ff.
    Compounds: Compp. z. B. κηρεσσι-φόρητος `by the Keres driven (into death)' (Q 527; Schwyzer 446, Pfister Würzb. Jb. 3, 406f.), κηρι-τρεφεῖς `brought up for death' ( ἄνθρωποι, Hes. Op. 418), κηρο-τρόφος `feeding death, deadly' ( ὄφις, Nic. Th. 192); ἐπί-κηρος `fallen to death' (Hp., Arist., hell.); also ἀ-κήρ-ατος with ἀκηράσιος and ἀ-κήρ-ιος `unharmed', s. 1. ἀκήρατος and Sommer Nominalkomp. 152.
    Derivatives: κηρέσιον ὀλέθριον, νοσηρόν H. (after θεσπέσιος); κηραίνω `damage, destroy' (A. Supp. 999, Ph.; after πημαίνω), κηρόομαι `be injured' (EM).
    Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]
    Etymology: A root noun, which has been derived from κεραΐζω; Sanskrit and Celtic have a root aorist (s. on κεραΐζω); so κήρ would prop. be an agent noun "the destroyer". The disyll. root however, is a problem: we would expect *κηρας (cf. γῆρας \< *ǵērh₂-s). Problematic is further the long vowel α in Alc. ( κᾶρι B 6 A 7) and Alcm. ( κᾶρα Fr. 56; trad. κάραν), PGr. *κά̄ρ (cf. κάρ θάνατος H.). Also καριῶσαι ἀποκτεῖναι and ἐκαρίωσας ἀπέκτεινας H. have α which will have been long (there is no evidence for short α. Then we have the old Attic saying θύραζε Κᾶρες, οὑκ ἔτ' Άνθεστήρια. That Κᾶρες meant `Carians', i.e. `slaves' is clearly an aetological story invented to explain the α. See also Brunel PPh. 41 (1967) 81-104.) Opposed to κᾶρι, κᾶρα in Alc. and Alcm. stand κῆρες and κήρ both in Pi. Fr. 277 and in the choral songs of the tragedy. The suggestion of an ablauting paradigm κήρ, *κᾰρός (not retained in ἐν καρὸς αἴσῃ, s. καρός) with a secondary nom. *κά̄ρ (Ehrlich Sprachgesch. 9f.) cannot be maintained. The conclusion is that the long α is original; the η is simply the IA development of the long α (which was spread over a larger area). The word, then, is Pre-Greek, as may be expected for such an archaic idea: there is no IE root *kār-. Beekes, xxx, 200x, ppp - ppp. Lee Glotta 39 (1961) 191-207 and Ramat Arch. glottol. it. 50 (1965) 137ff. derive the word from κείρω, which is hardly probable.
    Page in Frisk: 1,842-843

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > κηρός (1)

  • 19 καιρός

    καιρός, οῦ, ὁ (Hes.+; loanw. in rabb.)
    ① a point of time or period of time, time, period, freq. with implication of being esp. fit for someth. and without emphasis on precise chronology
    ⓐ gener. (cp. Just., D. 32, 4 τὸν γὰρ καιρὸν [Da 7:26] ἑκατὸν ἔτη ἐξηγεῖσθε λέγεσθαι) κ. δεκτός a welcome time 2 Cor 6:2a (Is 49:8); cp. vs. 2b. καιροὶ χαλεποί difficult times 2 Ti 3:1. In ref. to times of crisis for the state λοιμικοῦ καιροῦ 1 Cl 55:1 (s. JFischer ad loc. note 322) καιροὶ καρποφόροι fruitful times or seasons (so Achmes 156, 15f: καρποφόρος is the καιρός in which the tree bears fruit, in contrast to late autumn, when there is no more) Ac 14:17 (OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f proposes, on the basis of Mod. Gk., the mng., ‘weather’, but the pl. is against this mng.). καιροὶ ἐαρινοί 1 Cl 20:9.—ἔσται καιρὸς ὅτε there will come a time when 2 Ti 4:3; εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον κ. to what time or what sort of time (some, e.g. NRSV, interpret τίνα=the person, but cp. PTebt 25, 18 [117 B.C.] καὶ διὰ τίνος καὶ ἀπὸ ποίου ἐπιδείγματος; s. ποῖος 1aα, also ποτατός) 1 Pt 1:11. ἄχρι καιροῦ until (another) time, for a while Lk 4:13; Ac 13:11; ἐν καιρῷ ὀλίγῳ in a little time 1 Cl 23:4; ἐν παντὶ κ. at all times, always (Aristot. 117a, 35; Sir 26:4) Lk 21:36; Eph 6:18; Hm 5, 2, 3. κατὰ καιρόν from time to time, regularly (TestJob 36:4; Lucian, Hermot. 10; Plut., Mor. 984d) J 5:4 (s. 2 also); 1 Cl 24:2; GJs 3:3; πρὸς κ. for a limited time (perh. also for the present moment; cp. Strabo 6, 2, 3; Ps.-Plut., Fluv. 23; BGU 265, 20 [II A.D.]; 618, 19; 780, 14; Wsd 4:4; Philo, Post. Cai. 121; Jos., Bell. 6, 190; Tat. 13, 1) Lk 8:13; 1 Cor 7:5. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας (a combination of πρὸς κ. and πρὸς ὥραν [2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5; Phlm 15; J 5:35]) for a short time (cp. our ‘for a short space of time’) 1 Th 2:17.
    ⓑ a moment or period as especially appropriate the right, proper, favorable time ἐν καιρῷ at the right time (X., An. 3, 1, 39; Diod S 36, 7, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 8 §29; SIG 1268 [Praecepta Delphica II, 6; III B.C.]) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42 (cp. on both Ps 103:27, w. v.l.). καιρῷ (Thu. 4, 59, 3 v.l.; Diog. L. 1, 41) Lk 20:10 (v.l. ἐν κ.). τῷ καιρῷ Mk 12:2. ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμός, ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος the proper time for me (you) J 7:6, 8 (Eunap., Vi. Iambl. p. 459 Didot: the worker of miracles acts ὅταν καιρὸς ᾖ). νῦν κ. ταῦτα ὑμᾶς μαθεῖν οὐκ ἔστιν now is not the time for you to learn this AcPl Ha 1, 26 (Just., D. 8, 1 ἃ νῦν κ. οὐκ ἔστι λέγειν al.).—καιρὸν λαβεῖν find a favorable time, seize the opportunity (Lysias, C. Agor. 6; Cleanthes [III B.C.]: Stoic. I no. 573; Diod S 2, 6, 5; EpArist 248; Jos., Bell. 1, 527, Ant. 4, 10; cp. PTebt 332, 9). καιρὸν μεταλαβεῖν (s. μεταλαμβάνω 2) Ac 24:25. λαβεῖν κ. εὔθετον find a convenient opportunity Pol 13:1. κ. ἔχειν have opportunity (Thu. 1, 42, 3; Pla., Ep. 7, 324b; Plut., Lucull. 501 [16, 4]; PFlor 259, 3; 1 Macc 15:34; Jos., Ant. 16, 73; 335; Ath., R. 23 p. 77, 6; Did., Gen. 112, 10) Gal 6:10; Hb 11:15; 2 Cl 16:1; ISm 9:1; IRo 2:1. ὀλίγον καιρὸν ἔχειν Rv 12:12. ἐξαγοράζεσθαι τὸν κ. make the most of the opportunity Col 4:5; Eph 5:16 (s. ἐξαγοράζω 2). On Ro 12:11 v.l. s. δουλεύω 2aβ and b. κατὰ κ. Ro 5:6 is more naturally construed with ἀπέθανεν than with ἀσεβῶν (cp. κατὰ καιρὸν θεριζόμενος reaped in its proper time Job 5:26).—The concept of the appropriate time oft. blends with that of
    ② a defined period for an event. definite, fixed time. Abs. καιροί festal seasons (Ex 23:14, 17; Lev 23:4.—So perh. also beside θυσίαι in the Ins de Sinuri ed. LRobert ’45 no. 42) Gal 4:10 (κ. w. ἡμέρα as Polyaenus 8, 23, 17). τὰς τῶν καιρῶν ἀλλαγὰς καταδιαιρεῖν … ἃ μὲν εἰς ἑορτάς, ἃς δὲ εἰς πένθη to set up periods of fasting and mourning in accord with changes in seasons Dg 4:5.—Not infreq. w. a gen., which indicates the reason why the time is set apart (Pla., Leg. 4, 709c χειμῶνος καιρός; Aesop, Fab. 258 P.=255 H-H./206 Ch. ἀπολογίας κ., also oft. LXX; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 191 κ. εὐφροσύνης; Jos., Ant. 18, 74; Tat. 36, 1 κατʼ ἐκεῖνον αὐτὸν … τὸν τοῦ πολέμου κ.; Hippol., Ref. 9, 30, 27 κ. τῆς παρουσίας; Did., Gen. 175, 2 κ. τοῦ ἐξελθεῖν εἰς τὴν γῆν) κ. θερισμοῦ time of harvest Mt 13:30 (JosAs 2:19). κ. τῶν καρπῶν time when the fruit is ripe 21:34; cp. vs. 41. κ. σύκων time when the figs are ripe Mk 11:13 (ParJer 5:31; cp. Horapollo 2, 92 ὁ κ. τῶν ἀμπέλων). κ. μετανοίας time for repentance 2 Cl 8:2. κ. πειρασμοῦ Lk 8:13b. ὁ κ. τῆς ἀναλύσεως the time of death 2 Ti 4:6. κ. ἐπισκοπῆς σου Lk 19:44. κ. διορθώσεως Hb 9:10. κ. ἡλικίας 11:11. κ. τῆς ἡγεμονίας Ποντίου Πιλάτου the time of the procuratorship of P. P. IMg 11. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ μαρτυρίου at the time of martyrdom EpilMosq 2 (cp. Mel., HE 4, 26, 3 ᾧ Σάγαρις καιρῷ ἐμαρτύρησεν). ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ καιρῷ (Num 9:7) 2 Th 2:6. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν the time set for the fulfillment of Gabriel’s words Lk 1:20; cp. Dg 11:5 (s. διαγγέλλω 2). ὁ κ. μου my time=the time of my death Mt 26:18. κ. τοῦ ἰαθῆναι time to be healed 2 Cl 9:7. κ. τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα 1 Pt 4:17; cp. the extraordinary ἦλθεν ὁ κ. τῶν νεκρῶν κριθῆναι καὶ δοῦναι = ἵνα κριθῶσιν οἱ νεκροὶ καὶ δῷς Rv 11:18.—Pl. (Num 9:3 κατὰ καιρούς; Tob 14:4 S πάντα συμβήσεται τοῖς καιροῖς αὐτῶν; Heraclit. Sto. 11 p. 18, 18=the periods of time between; Maximus Tyr. 1, 2f πολλοὶ κ.; TestNapht 7:1 δεῖ ταῦτα πληρωθῆναι κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς αὐτῶν; Ar. 4, 2 κατὰ καιρούς) καιροὶ ἐθνῶν times of the Gentiles (in which they may inflict harm on God’s people or themselves be converted) Lk 21:24.—κατὰ καιρόν at the appropriate time (Arrian, Anab. 4, 5, 1; PSI 433, 4 [261 B.C.]; Just., A I, 19, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 3) J 5:4; 1 Cl 56:15 (Job 5:26). Also ἐν καιρῷ (Himerius, Or 13 [Ecl. 14], 3): ἐν καιρῷ αὐτοῦ B 11:6, 8 (Ps 1:3). καιρῷ ἰδίῳ in due time Gal 6:9. Pl. καιροῖς ἰδίοις at the right time 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; cp. 1 Cl 20:4 (Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰδίων κ.).—κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον καιρόν vs. 10.—πεπλήρωται ὁ κ. the time (determined by God) is fulfilled Mk 1:15. Pl. (cp. Ps 103:19) ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιρούς he (God) has determined allotted times (MDibelius, SBHeidAk ’38/39, 2. Abh. p. 6f, ‘seasons’; cp. 1QM 10, 12–15; FMussner, Einige Parallelen [Qumran and Areopagus speech], BZ 1, ’57, 125–30) Ac 17:26; cp. κατὰ καιροὺς τεταγμένους 1 Cl 40:1; ὡρισμένοις καιροῖς καὶ ὥραις vs. 2; τοῖς προστεταγμένοις κ. vs. 4.
    ③ a period characterized by some aspect of special crisis, time
    ⓐ gener.: the present (time) Ro 13:11; 12:11 v.l. ὁ καιρός (i.e. the crisis involving Christians) ἀπαιτεῖ σε the times call upon you IPol 2:3 (Diod S 17, 27, 2 ὑπὸ τῶν καιρῶν προεκλήθησαν=they were called out by the [critical circumstances of the] times). Also ὁ νῦν κ. (PSI 402, 7 [III B.C.] ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ) Ro 3:26; 8:18; 11:5; 2 Cor 8:14; B 4:1. κ. ὁ νῦν τῆς ἀνομίας the present godless time 18:2 (s. also b below). ὁ κ. ὁ ἐνεστηκώς (Polyb. 1, 60, 9; Jos., Ant. 16, 162) Hb 9:9; ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ κ. at that time, then (Gen 21:22; Is 38:1; τῷ κ. ἐκείνῳ TestSol D 8, 2) Mt 11:25; 12:1; 14:1; cp. Eph 2:12. Also κατʼ ἐκεῖνον τὸν κ. (Jos., Ant. 1, 171, Vi. 49; GJs 10:2.—Diod S 2, 27, 1 and Vi. Aesopi G 81 P. κατʼ ἐκείνους τοὺς καιρούς=at that time. Cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 10.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. ἔτι κατὰ καιρὸν ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν for those who at that time were still godless Ro 5:6, though κατὰ κ. here prob.=at the right time, as in mng. 1b above (s. B-D-F §255, 3). τῷ τότε τῆς ἀδικίας καιρῷ … τὸν νῦν τῆς δικαιοσύνης Dg 9:1; cp. 9:2. Of the future κατὰ τ. καιρὸν τοῦτον at this time Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10, 14). Cp. EpilMosq 2 in 2 above. ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ κ. just at that time (2 Esdr 5:3) Lk 13:1. W. attraction of the relative ἐν ᾧ κ. at that time, then Ac 7:20. κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν ὸ̔ν καὶ πέρυσι at the same time as in the year preceding Hv 2, 1, 1.
    ⓑ One of the chief terms relating to the endtime: ὁ καιρός the time of crisis, the last times (FBusch, Z. Verständnis d. synopt. Eschatol. Mk 13 neu untersucht ’38; GDelling, D. Zeitverständn. des NTs ’40; WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; WKümmel, Verheissung. u. Erfüllung ’45,3 ’56; OCullmann, Christus u. d. Zeit ’46 [tr. FFilson, Christ and Time ’50, 39–45; 79; 121]) ὁ κ. ἤγγικεν Lk 21:8. ὁ κ. ἐγγύς Rv 1:3; 22:10. οὐκ οἴδατε πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν Mk 13:33. Cp. Ro 13:11 (s. 3a above) if it is to be interpreted as eschatological (cp. Plut., Mor. 549f). πρὸ καιροῦ before the endtime and the judgment Mt 8:29; 1 Cor 4:5. ἐν καιρῷ 1 Pt 5:6. Also ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1:5; D 16:2. Pl. πλήρωμα τῶν καιρῶν Eph 1:10. ἐπηρώτων … περὶ τῶν καιρῶν, εἰ ἤδη συντέλειά ἐστιν Hv 3, 8, 9. τὰ σημεῖα τ. καιρῶν the signs of the (Messianic) times Mt 16:3. τοὺς καιροὺς καταμάνθανε learn to understand the times IPol 3:2 (s. WBauer, Hdb. Suppl. vol. ad loc.) The Messianic times described as καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως Ac 3:20.—ἔσχατοι καιροί (or ὕστεροι καιροί 1 Ti 4:1) come before the ἔσχατος κ. IEph 11:1 (cp. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων κ. AcPl Ha 8, 26 [restoration is certain=Ox 1601, 40/BMM recto 34]); χρόνοι ἢ καιροί times and seasons (cp. Iren. 1, 17, 2 [Harv. I 168, 9] and καιρῶν κατὰ χρόνους ἀλλαγή Theoph. Ant. 1, 6 [p. 70, 1]; Artem. 4, 2 p. 203, 25f the χρόνος is divided into καιροὶ καὶ ὧραι), which must be completed before the final consummation Ac 1:7 (Straton of Lamps. in FWehrli, Die Schule des Aristoteles, V Fgm. 10, 32f κατὰ τοὺς καιροὺς καὶ τοὺς χρόνους; quoted in JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62, 33; see also Diog. L. 5, 64); cp. 1 Th 5:1. συντέμνειν τοὺς καιρούς shorten the (last) times B 4:3. Sim. in sg. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν 1 Cor 7:29.—The expr. καιρὸν καὶ καιροὺς κ. ἥμισυ καιροῦ also belongs to the eschatol. vocab.; it means the apocalyptic time of 1 + 2 + ½ = 3½ years, during which acc. to Da 12:7 (cp. 7:25) a tyrranical enemy of God and God’s people is to reign on earth Rv 12:14 (in imagery of a serpentine monster, δράκων)—ὁ κ. οὗτος the present age (cp. αἰών 2a) Mk 10:30; Lk 12:56; 18:30. Also ὁ νῦν κ. B 4:1. As ruled by the devil: ὁ ἄνομος κ. 4:9. καταργεῖν τὸν κ. τοῦ ἀνόμου destroy the age of the lawless one 15:5. The soul seeks και[ρο]ῦ χρόνου αἰ̣ῶ̣νος ἀνάπαυσιν ἐ̣[ν] σιγῇ peace in silence, at the time of the aeon crisis GMary 463, 1.—On Dg 12:9 s. the editions of vGebh.-Harnack and Bihlmeyer.—JMánek, NTS 6, ’59, 45–51; JBarr, Biblical Words for Time, ’62.—B. 954. Schmidt, Syn. II 54–72. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καιρός

  • 20 ἄν

    ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,
    A

    εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2

    , 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.
    A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.
    I WITH INDICATIVE:
    1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,
    a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh.

    καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4

    . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,

    εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;

    εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3

    .
    c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.
    d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.
    2 with [tense] fut. ind.:
    a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;

    ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80

    ; so in Lyr.,

    μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68

    , cf. I.6(5).59.
    b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,

    σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140

    ;

    οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d

    , cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;

    οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36

     (corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.
    II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future,

    οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54

    , al.
    III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):
    a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:

    ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    ;

    οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b

    :—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.
    b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;

    ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116

    , cf. D.1.26, al.
    c with protasis understood:

    φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269

    ; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447;

    οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240

    , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time,

    Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85

    .
    d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.
    e in questions, expressing a wish:

    τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100

    , cf.A.Ag. 1448;

    πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389

    : hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty,

    τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94

    ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.
    f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.
    g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis:

    ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231

    , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,

    θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186

    ;

    τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605

    .
    h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.
    IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,

    τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b

    ) representing ind. or opt.:
    1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.
    2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.
    b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.
    3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:
    a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.
    b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.
    4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional,

    ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c

     (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,

    νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8

    , cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.
    I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once

    εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288

    , twice

    εἴπερ ἄν 5.224

    , 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.
    2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.
    3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,

    σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32

    ;

    ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e

    ;

    μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a

     (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.

    ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156

     ( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.
    II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.

    εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597

    ),

    εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353

    ; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in

    ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81

    .
    2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;

    ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6

    :—similarly after a preceding opt.,

    οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d

    .
    III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:
    1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:

    αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213

    :—so with relat.,

    οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175

    .
    2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,

    εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526

    ; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.
    IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as

    ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56

    ;

    ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136

     (iv A. D.);

    ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19

    ; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.
    C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;

    εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295

    ; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;

    διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b

    : inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.
    D GENERAL REMARKS:
    I POSITION OF ἄν.
    1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as

    εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281

    -4; rarely by τις, as

    ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14

    :—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as

    εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355

    , cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,

    ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45

    ;

    ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420

    : also

    ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e

    , cf. 850a;

    ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c

    .
    2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.
    3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;

    οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2

    ; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;

    οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b

    ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12

    .
    4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,

    ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax

     <*>37.
    II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,

    ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333

    , cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15;

    ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244

    , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.
    2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.
    III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι)

    , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935

    :—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)

    εἰ.. Isoc.10.48

    :—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.
    IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:

    πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049

    : even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,
    A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,

    ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b

    ; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;

    ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4

    : not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • then and there — {adv. phr.} At that very time and place in the past; right then. * /He said he wanted his dime back then and there, so I had to give it to him./ Compare: IN ONE S TRACKS, ON THE SPOT, HERE AND NOW …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • then and there — {adv. phr.} At that very time and place in the past; right then. * /He said he wanted his dime back then and there, so I had to give it to him./ Compare: IN ONE S TRACKS, ON THE SPOT, HERE AND NOW …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • then and there — adverb Date: 15th century on the spot ; immediately < wanted the money right then and there > …   New Collegiate Dictionary

  • Here and there — There There, adv. [OE. ther, AS. [eth][=ae]r; akin to D. daar, G. da, OHG. d[=a]r, Sw. & Dan. der, Icel. & Goth. [thorn]ar, Skr. tarhi then, and E. that. [root]184. See {That}, pron.] 1. In or at that place. [They] there left me and my man, both… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • here and there — {adv. phr.} 1. In one place and then in another. * /I looked here and there for my pen, but I didn t look everywhere./ * /Here and there in the yard little yellow flowers had sprung up./ 2. In various directions. * /We went here and there looking …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • here and there — {adv. phr.} 1. In one place and then in another. * /I looked here and there for my pen, but I didn t look everywhere./ * /Here and there in the yard little yellow flowers had sprung up./ 2. In various directions. * /We went here and there looking …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • Now and Then, Here and There — Promotional image for Now and Then, Here and There depicting Shu and Lala Ru 今、そこに いる僕 (Ima, Soko ni Iru Boku) …   Wikipedia

  • The Return / Then and Now (album) — Infobox Album Name = The Return Type = Album Artist = Vanilla Fudge |200.px Released = 2002 Recorded = Genre = Psychedelic rock Length = Label = WorldSound Records Producer = Carmine Appice Reviews = * Allmusic Rating|3.5|5… …   Wikipedia

  • there — See: ALL THERE, HERE AND THERE, NEITHER HERE NOR THERE, THEN AND THERE …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • there — See: ALL THERE, HERE AND THERE, NEITHER HERE NOR THERE, THEN AND THERE …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • There Will Be Blood — Theatrical release poster Directed by Paul Thomas Anderson Produced by …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»